JVC DVD Recorder VR 716E User Manual

DIGITAL VIDEO RECORDER  
INSTRUCTIONS  
VR-716E  
HDD  
OPERATE  
CANCEL  
SEARCH  
MENU  
1
2
ALARM  
5
6
REV  
FWD  
SENSOR  
3
4
ALARM  
7
8
TIMER  
LOCK  
SENSOR  
9
10  
1
ALARM  
13  
15  
14  
16  
OUT  
VIDEO  
SENSOR  
DISPLAY  
EXECUTE  
AUDIO  
SEQUENCE  
MULTI  
REC  
STOP  
PLAY  
STILL  
11  
ALARM  
SKIP  
SENSOR  
[ENGLISH]  
The instruction manual in pdf version is stored as ‘VR-716E_en.pdf’  
under the ‘VR-716E_Manual’ folder in the provided CD-ROM. For re-  
ference method, please see page 3.  
[DEUTSCH]  
Die Bedienungsanleitung ist unter dem Namen ‘VR-716E_de.pdf’ im  
Ordner ‘VR-716E_Manual’ auf der beiliegenden CD-ROM gespei-  
chert. Hinweise zur Benutzung finden Sie auf Seite 3.  
[FRANÇAIS]  
Le manuel de l’utilisateur est archivé sous le nom de ‘VR-716E_-  
fr.pdf’ dans le dossier intitulé ‘VR-716E_Manual’ du CD-ROM fourni.  
Pour de plus amples informations sur la méthode de référence, voir  
page 3.  
[ESPAÑOL]  
Please read the followings before getting started:  
Thank you for purchasing this JVC product.  
Before operating this unit, please read the instructions  
carefully to ensure the best possible performance.  
Set the “TIME ZONE” before operating this unit.  
For the setting method, refer to ‘Setting the Date/Time’  
on page 16.  
El manual de instrucciones está guardado como ‘VR-716E_es.pdf’  
en la carpeta ‘VR-716E_Manual’ del CD-ROM proveído. Para méto-  
do de referencia, por favor, vea la página 3.  
[ITALIANO]  
Il manuale delle istruzioni è memorizzato come ‘VR-716E_it.pdf’ nel-  
la cartella ‘VR-716E_Manual’ contenuta nel CD-ROM allegato. Per il  
sistema di riferimento, si prega consultare pagina 3.  
LST0151-001A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS  
POWER SYSTEM  
Connection to the mains supply  
This unit operates on voltage of 220 V to 240 V AC,  
50 Hz/60 Hz.  
Warning Notice  
FOR YOUR SAFETY (Australia)  
1.Insert this plug only into effectively earthed three-  
pin power outlet.  
2.If any doubt exists regarding the earthing, consult a  
qualified electrician.  
3.Extension cord, if used, must be three-core  
WARNING:  
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC  
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE  
TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.  
correctly wired.  
IMPORTANT (In the United Kingdom)  
Mains Supply (AC 230 V)  
CAUTION  
WARNING – THIS APPARATUS  
To prevent electric shock, do not open the cabinet.  
No user serviceable parts inside. Refer servicing to  
qualified service personnel.  
MUST BE EARTHED  
The wires in this mains lead are coloured in  
accordance with the following code;  
GREEN-and-YELLOW : EARTH  
Note:  
BLUE  
BROWN  
: NEUTRAL  
: LIVE  
The rating plate and the safety caution are on the rear  
of the unit.  
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this  
apparatus may not correspond with the coloured  
markings identifying the terminals in your plug,  
proceed as follows.  
The wire which is coloured GREEN-AND-YELLOW  
must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is  
marked with the letter E or by the safety earth symbol  
or coloured GREEN or GREEN-AND-YELLOW.  
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected  
to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or  
which is coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured  
BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is  
marked with the letter L or coloured RED.  
The OPERATE button does not completely shut off  
mains power from the unit, but switches operating  
current on and off.  
WARNING  
It should be noted that it may be unlawful to re-record  
pre-recorded tapes, records, or discs without the  
consent of the owner of copyright in the sound or  
video recording, broadcast, or cable programme and  
in any literary, dramatic, musical or artistic work  
embodied therein.  
CAUTION  
RED colour indications on the operation panel are  
provided but they are not safety related, RED colour  
indications:  
(1) For Recording Button.  
Caution for AC Power Cord  
FOR YOUR SAFETY PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING TEXT CAREFULLY.  
Appropriate AC Power Cord must be used in each local area.  
FOR CONTINENTAL EUROPE, ETC.  
FOR U.K. ONLY  
Not to be used in the U.K.  
If the plug supplied is not suitable for your socket  
outlet, it should be cut off and appropriate one fitted.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS  
WARNING  
WARNING  
For PLUGGABLE EQUIPMENT, the socket outlet  
shall be installed near the equipment and shall be  
easily accessible.  
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment  
this product may cause radio interference in which  
case the user may be required to take adequate  
measures.  
Place of storage and use  
Maintaining the unit (Please turn off the power be-  
fore performing maintenance work.)  
Please avoid storing or using this DVR in the following  
places:  
• Extremely hot or cold places beyond the allowable tem-  
perature for operation (5˚C - 40˚C).  
• Humid or dry places beyond the allowable humidity range  
for operation (30 % - 80 % RH).  
Please wipe the unit with a soft cloth. Do not wipe it with  
thinner or benzene lest the surface melts or becomes dull.  
For stubborn stains, wipe first with a water-dilluted neutral  
detergent and then wipe dry.  
• Dusty or sandy places.  
• Places exposed to oil, smoke or steam, such as the  
kitchen vicinity.  
Please use the supplied power cord. Using a differ-  
ent type or damaged cord may cause fire or electric  
shock.  
• Vibrating or unstable places.  
• Places prone to condensation.  
• Places that generates strong magnetic fields, e.g., trans-  
former or motor.  
• Places near devices that generate electric waves, e.g.,  
transceiver or mobile phone.  
Hard-disk  
The hard-disk is a consumable item.  
Replacement is recommended after 10000 hours of use (if  
use in a 25˚C environment).  
For information on maintenance planning and costs, con-  
sult your nearest JVC dealer.  
• Places that generate radiation, X-rays or corrosive gases.  
Handling the unit  
To save energy, be sure to turn off the system when  
• Please do not place heavy objects on the DVR, like a  
monitor or TV.  
not in use.  
• Please do not block the ventilation openings.  
• Avoid violent shocks to the unit. Do not drop the unit.  
How to read the Instruction manual (pdf file)  
[ESPAÑOL]  
[ENGLISH]  
1. Introduzca el CD-ROM proveído en el PC, haga click en  
[AdobeRdr60_esp.exe] en la carpeta “AdobeReader” para insta-  
lar el AdobeReader 6.0.  
2. Haga doble click en [VR-716E_es.pdf] en la carpeta “VR-  
716E_Manual” para leer el fichero.  
1. Insert the provided CD-ROM into PC, click [AdobeRdr60_enu.exe]  
in the “AdobeReader” folder to install AdobeReader 6.0.  
2. Double-click the [VR-716E_en.pdf] in the “VR-716E_Manual”  
folder to read the file.  
[DEUTSCH]  
[ITALIANO]  
1. Legen Sie die beiliegende CD-ROM in das CD-ROM-Laufwerk  
Ihres Computers. Öffnen Sie den Ordner “AdobeReader” auf der  
CD-ROM und doppelklicken Sie auf das Programm  
[AdobeRdr60_deu.exe], um den Adobe Acrobat Reader 6.0 zu  
installieren.  
1. Inserire il CD-ROM allegato nel PC, fare clic su  
[AdobeRdr60_ita.exe] nella cartella “AdobeReader” per installare  
6.0.  
2. Fare doppio clic su [VR-716E_it.pdf] nella cartella “VR-  
716E_Manual” per leggere il file.  
2. Doppelklicken Sie dann auf die Datei [VR-716E_de.pdf] im Ord-  
ner “VR-716E_Manual”, um die Bedienungsanleitung zu öffnen.  
[FRANÇAIS]  
1. Placez le CD dans le lecteur et cliquez sur [AdobeRdr60_fra.exe]  
dans le dossier “AdobeReader” pour installer AdobeReader 6.0.  
2. Double-cliquez sur [VR-716E_fr.pdf] dans le dossier “VR-  
716E_Manual” pour lire le fichier.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Content  
Getting Started  
Connecting to a PC  
Table of Content ....................................................................... 4  
Main Features ........................................................................... 5  
Precautions .............................................................................. 6  
Names and Functions .............................................................. 7  
What is a Web Browser?  
You can do the followings ..................................................... 73  
Cautions for Proper Use of the Web Browser...................... 74  
Setup Flow .............................................................................. 75  
Connecting to a Web Browser and Setting Up  
Connecting Using a LAN Cable ............................................ 76  
Setting Up a Network for VR-716 .......................................... 77  
Setting Up a PC Network  
• When Using Windows XP ................................................. 78  
• When Using Windows 2000 .............................................. 79  
Connecting (Login) to the Network ...................................... 81  
Installation and Preparation  
System Connection (When Connecting 16 Cameras) ........ 14  
Mounting to a Rack ................................................................ 15  
Turning On/Off the Power ...................................................... 15  
Setting the Date/Time ............................................................ 16  
Onscreen Display ................................................................... 19  
Routine Uses of the Web Browser  
Menus  
Setting a Title for Each Camera Channel Screen ................ 82  
Record Program Using the Program Timer ......................... 83  
• Setting Screen .................................................................. 83  
• Start recording on a specific time of the week .................. 84  
• Start recording at a specific time everyday ....................... 85  
• Start recording on a specific day and time........................ 86  
• Start recording at a specific date ...................................... 87  
Setting VR-716 to the Program Timer Standby Mode ......... 88  
Checking Recording Operation After Release Timer  
Menu Flow Chart .................................................................... 20  
Changing Menu Settings ....................................................... 22  
Routine Uses  
Viewing Live Camera Images  
• When connecting the monitor to the [EE OUT] terminal ... 32  
• When connecting the monitor to the [VIDEO OUT]  
terminal ............................................................................. 33  
• Setting Time Interval for Switching Displays in the  
Single Picture Mode.......................................................... 34  
• Setting Time Interval for Switching Displays in the  
Quad Picture Mode ........................................................... 35  
Recording Camera Images  
• Recording in the Normal Mode ......................................... 36  
• Repeat Recording (Repeat Record Feature) .................... 37  
Viewing Recorded Images  
• Playing Back Recorded Images ........................................ 38  
• Viewing Recorded Images in the Split Screen Mode ........ 39  
• Searching Image According to Date/Time  
(“DATE/TIME SEARCH”) .................................................. 40  
• Searching Image According to Alarm/Sensor Data  
(“ALARM/SENSOR SEARCH”) ........................................ 41  
• Adjusting Playback Speed (Jog/Shuttle Playback) ........... 42  
• Viewing Recorded Images in the Skip Mode .................... 43  
• Enlarging the Still Image (Still Image Zoom) .................... 44  
Record Programming Using the Program Timer  
• Weekly Timer (For starting recording on a specific  
day and time on a weekly basis) ....................................... 46  
• Weekly Timer (For starting recording on a specific  
time of the day) ................................................................. 48  
• Weekly Timer (For starting recording on a specific  
day of the week and time) ................................................. 50  
• Date Timer ........................................................................ 52  
• Canceling a Record Program............................................ 54  
• Changing a Record Program ............................................ 54  
is Executed ............................................................................. 89  
Changing/Deleting Record Programs in the Program  
Timer ....................................................................................... 90  
Searching Image According to Date/Time (Event Search)  
• Searching Alarm/Sensor recording ................................... 91  
• Search By Date/Time ........................................................ 92  
• Search By Term ................................................................ 93  
Useful Browser Features  
Restricting Access to VR-716 ............................................... 94  
Restricting Access to Recorded Image Files at VR-716 ..... 95  
Changing Network Settings of VR-716 from PC .................. 96  
Mail Notification Setting During Alarm/Sensor Input ......... 97  
Viewing Images of Event Search Results  
(Simple Viewer)....................................................................... 99  
Saving VR-716 Settings to a File......................................... 101  
Uploading VR-716 Settings ................................................. 103  
Information About Open Source Software ........................ 104  
Explanations  
Troubleshooting  
• Problems Related to Error Code and Onscreen  
Display ............................................................................ 105  
• Other Problems ............................................................... 106  
Troubleshooting on Use of Browsers .............................. 107  
Web Browser Glossary ........................................................ 110  
Recording Mechanism  
• Normal Recording ........................................................... 111  
• Repeat Record................................................................ 112  
• Presensor Recording ...................................................... 113  
Skip Jump ............................................................................. 114  
Recording Duration.............................................................. 115  
RS-232C Connection ........................................................... 115  
Notes related to Summer Time ........................................... 116  
Useful Features  
• Hard Disk Maintenance .................................................... 55  
• Defrag ............................................................................... 57  
• Initializing the Hard Disk (“FORMAT”) ............................... 58  
• Hard Disk Mirroring ........................................................... 59  
To view the list of Power Outage Recovery Records ........ 60  
• Series Recording Using 2 or More VR-716 Recorders ..... 61  
• Activation of Recording Via External Signals .................... 61  
• External Hard Disk Drives................................................. 62  
• Hard Disk Recovery Feature............................................. 63  
• Copying to DVD-RAM ....................................................... 64  
• Activation of Recording Via External Alarm/Sensor  
Others  
Specifications ....................................................................... 117  
Signals .............................................................................. 66  
• Using the Motion Detect Feature ...................................... 68  
• Motion detect check mode and setting guidance .............. 70  
• Continuing with Recording Upon Recovery from  
Power Failure .................................................................... 71  
• Setting a Title for Each Camera Channel Screen ............. 72  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
Thank you for  
purchasing this VR-716E  
Digital Video Recorder.  
In the subsequent sections of this manual, this equipment shall be referred to as VR-716.  
Main Features  
Built-in hard disk drive with a high  
capacity of 160 GB  
Simultaneous recording of 400 images /  
sec in 16 channels  
Recording up to 400 images/second.  
Simultaneous Playback mode  
Playback, jog/shuttle playback and skip play are  
possible during recording.  
Monitor with display in quad or 16 split  
pictures  
16-channel video input can be displayed in quad  
or 16 pictures at 25 images per second on the  
monitor.  
Direct search on the screen  
Searches quickly for the date/time and alarm  
position to invoke.  
Alarm/Sensor Recording  
Switches automatically to the Alarm Recording  
mode as set in the menu when alarm signals  
are received during recording.  
Supports 16-channel asynchronous  
camera inputs  
Simultaneous recording/playback of images in  
16 asynchronous cameras.  
Network-compatible  
Recorded images can be viewed on LAN-con-  
nected computers.Titles and timer programs can  
also be set using computers.  
Motion Detect  
Automatically detects image motion within the  
specified area and starts alarm recording.  
Digital Water Mark  
Embeds data in images to protect data integrity  
against falsification and unauthorized detection  
during data replication.  
Transmission of alarm e-mails  
E-mails can be sent out to any computers dur-  
ing alarm (sensor) input.  
Recovery Recording during power out-  
age  
Upon recovery from a power outage that oc-  
curred during recording, VR-716 will resume re-  
cording in the mode prior to the failure.  
Timer Recording  
Daily/Weekly timer recording up to 8 programs.  
How to Use the Operation Lock  
VR-716 employs a secret operation lock system to prevent its power from being turned off by mistake or tampering with the record  
functions.When the operation lock is turned ON, the lock operation can be selected as either “ALLor “STOP REC” from the menu.  
Pg 25 ‘OPERATION LOCK’  
[LOCK]  
[CANCEL]  
Turning On the Operation Lock  
Press the [LOCK] and [EXECUTE] buttons  
HDD  
FWD  
OPERATE  
CANCEL  
SEARCH  
MENU  
REV  
simultaneously.  
• This locks the operation immediately and keys are disabled.  
(However, this does not apply to control via Web brows-  
ers.)  
TIMER  
LOCK  
OUT  
DISPLAY  
EXECUTE  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
SEQUENCE  
MULTI  
REC  
STOP  
PLAY  
STILL  
SKIP  
• [LOCK] is indicated on the front display.  
Turning Off the Operation Lock  
Front Display  
[EXECUTE]  
Press the [LOCK] and [CANCEL] buttons si-  
multaneously.  
• This deactivates the operation lock.  
For security reasons, it is recommended that you detach  
this page and keep it separately.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started (continued)  
Precautions  
A longer time may be required to search through  
data stored in this equipment if the volume is too  
huge.This is not a defect.  
Do not stack up the equipment to prevent tempera-  
ture within from rising.  
Do not stand this equipment vertically during use.  
Do not use the power cord supplied with this  
equipment on other devices.  
Handle this equipment with care. Do not subject it  
to physical shock.  
Please note that we will not provide compensation  
for any failure during recording or playback due to  
defects in this equipment or the hard disk drive.  
TV broadcast or other video (audio) recordings are  
for personal use only. Unauthorized use of these  
materials is strictly prohibited.  
Do not expose the equipment to physical shock  
during transport. In particular, do not move the  
equipment during recording or playback.  
This product utilizes the open source software.  
Refer to the instruction on page 104 to display the  
precise information.  
Please note that recorded images will be erased  
when replacing hard disks or upgrading firmware.  
The width of the borders on split screens (dark  
portion) may vary according to the type of input  
signal.This is a characteristic of this equipment  
and is not a defect.  
If a power failure occurs during formatting of hard  
disk, disconnection, or when configuring or  
disabling mirroring, operation of the equipment  
may be disabled even if it is connected to the UPS.  
Do not insert foreign object into this unit as this  
may cause malfunction or electric shock.  
How to Read this Manual  
The names of buttons used during operation are  
enclosed in [ ].  
Symbols used in this manual  
States precautions to be  
Caution  
Example: MENU button z [MENU]  
taken during operation.  
States restrictions on the  
Note  
All product names stated in this manual are trademarks  
or registered trademarks of their respective companies.  
functions or use of this  
equipment. For reference  
purposes.  
Marks such as TM ® and © are omitted in this manual.  
,
Indicates the page numbers  
or items to refer to.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Names and Functions (Front)  
5
4
3
2
1
HDD  
FWD  
OPERATE  
CANCEL  
SEARCH  
MENU  
1
3
2
4
ALARM  
5
7
6
REV  
SENSOR  
ALARM  
8
TIMER  
LOCK  
OUT  
SENSOR  
9
10  
1
13  
15  
14  
16  
ALARM  
SENSOR  
DISPLAY  
EXECUTE  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
SEQUENCE  
MULTI  
REC  
STOP  
PLAY  
STILL  
11  
ALARM  
SKIP  
SENSOR  
6
7
8
9
0
1 [OPERATE] Button and Operate LED  
• [PLAY] Button  
To turn off the power, press the button continuously for about  
2 seconds.  
Press this button to start playing.  
• Pressing this button when in the Stop mode:  
Starts playing from the point at which the previous play  
back ended.  
Page 15 ‘Turning On/Off the Power’  
2 Shuttle Dial  
• Pressing this button when in the Recording mode:  
Starts playing back while in the Recording mode. (Si-  
multaneous Record/Play)  
When in the Play or Still mode, turn this to adjust the play-  
back speed.  
Page 42 ‘Adjusting Playback Speed’  
Page 38 ‘Viewing Recorded Images’  
3 Jog Dial  
When in the Play or Still mode, turn this to enable single  
frame playback.Use this to select the preset values when a  
menu screen is displayed.  
Note  
• Playback immediately after the [OPERATE] button is  
turned ON either starts from the point or pauses at the  
point where the last recording has ended depending on  
the frame rate setting.  
Page 42 ‘Adjusting Playback Speed’  
4 [CANCEL] Button  
• Use this to delete Program Timer settings or a record  
program.  
Page 54 ‘Canceling a Record Program’  
• Press this to turn off the alarm/warning LED or the buzzer  
when an alarm/warning is activated.  
• [STILL] Button  
Press this button when in the Play mode to switch to the  
Still mode.  
8 [DISPLAY] Button for Switching Front Panel  
Display  
5 Front Display  
Displays the operational state and settings of the digital  
video recorder.  
Page 12 ‘Front Display’  
Press this button to switch between clock, date, remaining  
hard disk space and record setting (record quality, frame  
rate, audio) displays.  
6 Camera Selection Buttons and LEDs  
For selecting the camera channel to which output from the  
[VIDEO OUT] on the front panel 0 or rear panel °  
(Page 9) is sent. The LED of the channel selected will  
light up in green. The LED of the channel that received an  
alarm input will light up in red. It will light up in orange when  
the channel that received an alarm input is selected. The  
LED of the channel will blink in green when a camera is not  
connected. It will blink in orange when there is an alarm  
input and the camera is not connected.  
It is also used to switch between display in quad picture  
and single picture during playback of recorded video im-  
ages.  
Page 13 ‘Front Display’  
9 [SKIP] Search Buttons  
Press this button when in the Stop mode to jump to the  
beginning of a start or end point of a recording in the hard  
disk.  
Press this button when in the Play mode to Skip Jump.  
There are 3 Skip Jump modes:  
• “TIME” Jump  
: Jumps in fixed time intervals when but-  
ton is pressed.  
• “EVENT” Jump : Jumps to the starting point of events  
when button is pressed.  
• “ALARM” Jump : Jumps to the starting point of alarm re-  
cording when button is pressed.  
Page 23 “FDP” Menu z ‘INPUT SIGNAL ERROR’  
Page 39 ‘Viewing Recorded Images in the Split Screen  
Mode’  
Page 114 ‘Skip Jump’  
0 [VIDEO OUT] / [AUDIO OUT] Terminals (RCA)  
Outputs recorded video and audio when in the Play mode.  
Outputs inputted video and audio when in the Recording or  
Stop mode.  
7 Manual Operation Buttons  
• [REC] Button  
Press this button when in the Stop or Play mode to start  
recording.Recording mode can be specified on the menu  
screen.  
Note  
• Audio signals will not be output during playback if the frame  
rate of video images is set as “1/6 IPS” (1 image per 6  
seconds) or “1/12 IPS” (1 image per 12 seconds) in the  
“FRAME RATE” item (Page 24) of the “REC MODE”  
Menu.  
Page 36 ‘Recording Camera Images’  
• [STOP] Button  
Press this button to stop playing. Press this button when  
in the Simultaneous Record/Play mode to stop playing  
and switch to the normal recording mode.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started (continued)  
Names and Functions (Front)  
$
#
@
!
%
HDD  
FWD  
OPERATE  
CANCEL  
SEARCH  
MENU  
1
3
2
4
ALARM  
5
7
6
REV  
SENSOR  
ALARM  
8
TIMER  
LOCK  
OUT  
SENSOR  
9
10  
1
13  
15  
14  
16  
ALARM  
SENSOR  
DISPLAY  
EXECUTE  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
SEQUENCE  
MULTI  
REC  
STOP  
PLAY  
STILL  
11  
ALARM  
SKIP  
SENSOR  
^
&
*
(
! [HDD] LED  
& [SEQUENCE MULTI] / Split Screen Display Switch-  
ing Button and LED  
Lights up when the built-in hard disk drive is in operation.  
Press this button to change the display in the following ways:  
16 Split z Single Picture Automatic Switching z Quad Pic-  
ture Automatic Switching  
@ [MENU] Button  
Press this button to display the menu screen or to return  
from the menu to the main screen.  
When quad picture or 16 split are displayed, the LED lights  
up in orange. This is indicated in green when in the single  
picture automatic switching or quad picture automatic  
switching. Does not function when in the Play mode.  
Page 33 ‘When Connecting the Monitor to the [VIDEO  
OUT] terminal’  
Page 22 ‘Changing Menu Settings’  
# Cursor Control Buttons  
When the menu or search screens are displayed, use these  
buttons to move the cursor. Otherwise, these are used to  
change the onscreen display positions of the date or title.  
Page 19 ‘Onscreen Display’  
* [EXECUTE] Button  
$ [SEARCH] Button  
Use this button to perform alarm search or date/time search  
as well as to execute hard disk scanning or formatting or to  
perform other operations.  
Button for displaying the “SEARCH MENU”. Press this but-  
ton to perform alarm search or date/time search.  
Press again to return to the main screen.  
Page 40 ‘Searching Image According to Date/Time’  
% [TIMER] Button  
Page 40 ‘Searching Image According to Date/Time’  
Page 58 ‘Initializing the Hard Disk (“FORMAT”)’  
( [LOCK] Button  
Press this button to switch to the Standby mode after set-  
ting in the “PROGRAM TIMER” is completed. Press again  
to disable the Standby mode.  
When this button is pressed before setting the Program  
Timer, the buzzer will be activated and the [TIMER] indica-  
tor on the front display will start to blink.  
Press and hold this button followed by pressing the [STOP]  
button to adjust the seconds of the clock.  
• When the value is 29 seconds or less, this will be reset to  
00 seconds with the minute value unchanged.  
• When the value is 30 seconds and above, this will be  
reset to 00 seconds with the minute rounded to the next  
higher value.  
The ON/OFF of BUZZER depends on the “WARNING” set-  
ting in the “BUZZER” Menu.  
Page 24 ‘BUZZER Menu’  
Page 46Record Programming Using the ProgramTimer’  
^ [ALARM SENSOR] LED  
Blocks (every 4 entries) that are in the Alarm Recording  
Standby or Sensor Recording Standby modes will light up  
in green.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Names and Functions (Rear)  
¤
)
AUDIO IN  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
VIDEO IN  
THRU OUT  
SCSI  
CAUTION  
AUDIO OUT  
VIDEO OUT  
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK  
DO NOT OPEN  
LAN  
1
2
1
2
AVIS:RISQUE DE CHOC  
ELECTRIQ  
RS-232C  
UPS  
1
4/ 16  
12  
5
8
AC IN  
(220V–240V  
)
SIGNAL GND  
EXT REC  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11 13 15 RST COM  
IN  
IN  
CLK SER  
RST REC  
OUT OUT  
10 12 14 16 OUT  
ALARM  
9
13 16  
WAR  
OUT  
COM  
EE OUT  
‹ › fi  
°
·
¡
[AUDIO OUT 1, 2] Terminals 1 and 2 (RCA)  
) [AC IN (220 V - 240 V )] Power Inlet  
Outputs the audio input when in the Recording or Stop  
mode.  
Outputs recorded audio when in the Play mode.  
However, there will be no audio output in the following  
circumstances:  
• When playing back recorded images for which the frame  
rate is set as “1/6 IPS” (1 image per 6 seconds) or “1/12  
IPS” (1 image per 12 seconds) in the “FRAME RATE”  
menu switch.  
• When performing search other than x 1 mode or during  
Still or single frame playback.  
Connect using the power cord supplied to an AC 220 V -  
240 V outlet. The main unit will turn on automatically when  
connected.  
Page 15 ‘Turning On/Off the Power’  
[VIDEO IN] Camera Image Signal Input (BNC)  
Connect this to the video output of the video camera (sold  
separately).  
¤ [AUDIO IN] Terminal (RCA)  
Connect this to the audio output of the device for which  
audio recording is to be performed.  
[RS-232C] Remote Terminal (D-sub 9 Pin)  
VR-716 can be controlled externally by connecting it to a  
computer.  
[SCSI] Terminal (68-pin Ultra Wide SCSI)  
For connection to external hard disk drive (sold separately)  
and DVD-RAM drive (sold separately).  
[UPS] Uninterruptible Power Supply Control  
Terminal (D-sub 9 Pin)  
• When playing back images with the “AUDIO REC” item  
in the “REC MODE” menu selected as “OFF” during re-  
cording.  
• When the “MAIN MENU/OPERATION MENU” or  
“SEARCH MENU” is displayed in the Play mode.  
° [VIDEO OUT 1, 2] Terminals 1 and 2 (BNC)  
Outputs images selected using the Camera Selection But-  
tons 6 on the front panel.  
· [THRU OUT] Camera Image Output Terminal (BNC)  
Outputs camera image signals that correspond to each  
[VIDEO IN] terminal . For connection to TV monitors.  
(Automatic termination)  
For connection to the communication control connector of  
the UPS unit. For more details, please consult the outlet  
from which this equipment is purchased.  
[LAN] Connection Interface (100 Base-T)  
For connection to the Intranet and other networks using a  
LAN cable.  
Signal Input/Output Terminal  
For operating VR-716 using external alarm/sensor signals  
or signals received from external devices, or for operating  
external devices by outputting signals.  
Page 76 ‘Connecting Using a LAN Cable’  
Page 10Names and Functions (Signal In/OutTerminal)’  
¡ [EE OUT] (BNC)  
Outputs the live images on cameras connected to the  
[VIDEO IN] terminals in quad picture.  
The [1-4 / -16] connector can also be used to output im-  
ages in 16 split pictures.  
Page 32 ‘When Connecting the Monitor to the [EE OUT]  
terminal’  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started (continued)  
Names and Functions (Signal In/Out Terminal)  
(Rear)  
AUDIO IN  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
VIDEO IN  
THRU OUT  
SCSI  
CAUTION  
AUDIO OUT  
VIDEO OUT  
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK  
DO NOT OPEN  
LAN  
1
2
1
2
AVIS:RISQUE DE CHOC  
ELECTRIQ  
RS-232C  
UPS  
1
4/ 16  
5
8
AC IN  
(220V–240V  
)
SIGNAL GND  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11 13 15 RST COM  
IN  
IN  
EXT REC  
CLK SER  
WAR RST REC  
OUT OUT OUT  
10 12 14 16 OUT  
ALARM  
9
12  
13 16  
EE OUT  
COM  
ALARM RESET  
2
CLOCK RESET IN  
3
ALARM IN  
1
SERIES REC IN  
4
CAMERA 1, 3, 5,  
7, 9, 11, 13, 15  
EXT REC IN  
5
COM  
6
CAMERA 2, 4, 6,  
8, 10, 12, 14, 16  
EXT REC  
COM  
RST COM  
IN  
IN  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11 13 15  
CLK SER  
RST REC  
OUT OUT  
OUT  
10 12 14 16  
WAR  
OUT  
ALARM  
SERIES REC OUT  
7
CLOCK RESET OUT  
8
WARNING OUT  
9
ALARM REC OUT  
0
5 [EXT REC IN] Terminal  
1 [ALARM IN] Terminal (Supports Channels 1 - 16)  
Terminal that accepts input signals to start alarm or sensor  
recording.  
2 [ALARM RESET] Input Terminal  
Terminal that accepts signals to stop recording during alarm  
or sensor recording.  
Starts recording automatically upon receiving external sig-  
nals when the “EXT REC MODE” is set as “TRIGGER” or  
“MANUAL.  
Page 25 ‘OPERATION/EXT REC Menu’  
Page 61 ‘Activation of Recording Via External Signals’  
6 [COM] Common Ground Terminal  
This is a common ground terminal. For connection to the  
signal ground terminal of other devices.  
7 [SERIES REC OUT] Terminal  
3 [CLOCK RESET IN] Terminal  
For connection to a master clock or the [CLOCK RESET  
OUT] terminal of other devices.This equipment can be set  
to a master clock or the clock of other devices upon the  
input of clock reset signals.  
The clock in VR-716 will be reset as follows upon the input  
of clock reset signals:  
• When the value is 29 seconds or less, this will be reset to  
00 seconds with the minute value unchanged.  
• When the value is 30 seconds and above, this will be  
reset to 00 seconds with the minute rounded to the next  
higher value.  
Outputs signals when the remaining hard disk space is 1 %  
or less.  
However, there will be no signal output in the following cir-  
cumstances:  
• When theSERIES RECitem is set asOFFin the menu.  
Page 25 ‘OPERATION/EXT REC Menu’  
Page 61Series Recording Using 2 or More VR-716 Re-  
corders’  
Page 61 ‘Series Recording Using 2 or More VR-716 Re-  
corders’  
4 [SERIES REC IN] Terminal  
8 [CLOCK RESET OUT] Terminal  
Terminal for output of clock reset signals. Signals are out-  
put in the following cases:  
When the internal clock of VR-716 turns 00:00 or 12:00.  
Page 61Series Recording Using 2 or More VR-716 Re-  
corders’  
Series recording will start upon the input of [SERIES REC  
OUT] signals. This is the terminal that accepts the series  
recording signals of other VR-716s when multiple sets of  
VR-716 are used.  
Page 61 ‘Series Recording Using 2 or More VR-716 Re-  
corders’  
9 [WARNING OUT] Terminal  
Outputs signals during hard disk malfunction or error oc-  
currence. (Page 105)  
0 [ALARM REC OUT] Terminal  
Outputs signals when VR-716 is in the Alarm Recording or  
Sensor Recording mode.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Terminal  
Signal Level  
Remarks  
Grounded Input (44 k¸)  
5V  
High Voltage = 5 V  
Low Voltage = 0 V  
[CLOCK RESET IN]  
22k  
Min. 500 ms  
IN  
Ensure that the impedance at the output is 10 k¸ or less.  
22k  
SET  
Open Collector  
22k  
High Voltage = 5 V  
Low Voltage = 0 V  
OUT  
[CLOCK RESET OUT]  
SET  
1 s  
22k  
Grounded Input (44 k¸)  
5V  
High Voltage = 5 V  
[ALARM IN]  
Low Voltage = 0 V  
Min. 400 ms  
22k  
IN  
Ensure that the impedance at the output is 10 k¸ or less.  
SET  
22k  
During Alarm  
Recording  
High Output (4.7 k¸)  
12V  
High Voltage = 12 V  
Low Voltage = 0 V  
4.7k  
[ALARM REC OUT]  
[ALARM RESET]  
22k  
OUT  
SET  
22k  
High Input (44 k¸)  
Min. 400 ms  
3.3V  
High Voltage = 5 V ~ 12 V  
10k  
22k  
SET  
IN  
Ensure that the impedance at the output is 10 k¸ or less.  
22k  
Grounded Input (44 k¸)  
5V  
High Voltage = 5 V  
[EXT REC IN]  
Low Voltage = 0 V  
22k  
Min. 400 ms  
IN  
22k  
Ensure that the impedance at the output is 10 k¸ or less.  
SET  
LOW Output (1 k¸)  
5V  
High Voltage = 5 V  
Low Voltage = 0 V  
1k  
[SERIES REC OUT]  
OUT  
22k  
22k  
2.5 s ~ 3.0 s  
SET  
Grounded Input (44 k¸)  
5V  
High Voltage = 5 V  
Low Voltage = 0 V  
[SERIES REC IN]  
[WARNING OUT]  
22k  
IN  
2.5 s and above  
Ensure that the impedance at the output is 10 k¸ or less.  
SET  
22k  
High Output (4.7 k¸)  
Sending Warning  
12V  
High Voltage =12 V  
Low Voltage = 0 V  
4.7k  
OUT  
22k  
SET  
22k  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started (continued)  
Names and Functions (Front Display)  
HDD  
FWD  
OPERATE  
CANCEL  
SEARCH  
MENU  
1
2
4
ALARM  
5
7
6
REV  
SENSOR  
3
ALARM  
8
TIMER  
LOCK  
OUT  
SENSOR  
9
10  
1
ALARM  
13  
15  
14  
16  
SENSOR  
DISPLAY  
EXECUTE  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
SEQUENCE  
MULTI  
REC  
STOP  
PLAY  
STILL  
11  
ALARM  
SKIP  
SENSOR  
1
2
3
4
5 6  
7
8
9
0
2
(Timer) Indicator  
Lights up when in the Timer Recording Standby or Timer  
Recording mode.  
1 Operation Mode Indicator  
Displays the operation mode of VR-716.  
Recording  
Lights up in red.  
Page 46Record Programming Using the ProgramTimer’  
_
3
4
(Repeat Record) Indicator  
Lights up when VR-716 is set in the Repeat Record mode.  
Page 37 ‘Repeat Recording’  
(Overlap) Indicator  
Lights up when there is overlap in the timer recording pro-  
grams of the Weekly Timer.  
Play  
<
Still  
I
5 Weekly Timer Program No.  
When the Weekly Timer Recording is activated, the LED of  
the Program No. for which recording is currently executed  
will start blinking. When in the Timer Standby mode, the  
Timer Program No. which has been set will light up.  
The light goes off upon completion of the timer recording.  
6 [AL] (Alarm) Indicator  
Fast Forward / Slow Play  
<
=
<<  
==  
Rewind / Slow Play  
Lights up during the Alarm/Sensor Recording mode.  
Light will start to blink upon completion of alarm/sensor re-  
cording.  
Single Frame Playback  
< blinks.  
< I  
= I  
7 [LOCK] (Lock) Indicator  
Lights up when the operation lock is enabled.  
Single Frame Reverse Playback  
= blinks.  
8
(Alarm Recording) Indicator  
Lights up when in the Alarm Recording Standby mode.  
Page 66Activation of RecordingVia External Alarm/Sen-  
sor Signals’  
Simultaneous Playback  
<
_
9
(Sensor Recording) Indicator  
< and _ blink alternately.  
Lights up when in the Sensor Recording Standby mode.  
Page 66Activation of RecordingVia External Alarm/Sen-  
sor Signals’  
Still Mode During Simultaneous  
Playback  
I and _ blink alternately.  
_ I  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Names and Functions (Front Display)  
0 Counter/Setting Display  
Press the [DISPLAY] button 8 on the front panel to switch  
between the clock display, date display, remaining space  
display and record setting display.  
Clock Display: Example > 12:34:56, 1 March  
DISPLAY  
When in the Play mode, display of recording time on the playback screen is not  
possible.  
Date Display: Example > 1 March 2003 (When “DATE DISPLAY” setting in menu screen is “D/M/Y”)  
DISPLAY  
Remaining Hard Disk Space Display: Example > 1234 hours left  
Displays the remaining time of continuous recording when in the normal re-  
DISPLAY  
cording mode. Display is not shown during Repeat Recording.  
“REC MODE” Settings: Example > “BLOCK”:1”, “AUDIO REC”:ON”, “REC QUALITY”:H”, “FRAME RATE”:25”  
“FRAME RATE” is displayed as below corresponding to  
each setting value in the “REC MODE” Menu (Page 24)  
25 IPS “25”  
1.7 IPS “25/15”  
1 IPS “1”  
1/2 IPS “1/2”  
1/6 IPS “1/6”  
1/12 IPS “1/12”  
12.5 IPS “25/2”  
8.3 IPS “25/3”  
4.2 IPS “25/6”  
2.5 IPS “25/10”  
“FRAME RATE”  
“BLOCK NO.”  
“REC QUALITY” “AUDIO REC”  
“REC MODE” Settings: Example > “BLOCK”:2”, “AUDIO REC”:OFF”, “REC QUALITY”:L, “FRAME RATE”:1/12”  
Displays the recording conditions of each BLOCK when in the normal record-  
ing, Timer Recording or Alarm Recording mode. When in the Stop or Timer  
Standby mode, however, conditions for each BLOCK during normal recording  
are displayed. In addition, recording conditions of the images currently being  
played will be shown with priority when in the Play mode.  
Error Code Display: Example > Error01  
Page 105 ‘Problems Related to Error Code and Onscreen Display’  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation and Preparation  
System Connection (When Connecting 16 Cameras)  
Connection with up to 16 cameras is possible with VR-716’s switcher.  
<Example>  
• Perform recording/playback by connecting to 16 cameras.  
• Checking recorded images at Monitor 1 and live camera images on Monitors 2 ~ 5 at the same time.  
• Execution of alarm recording upon receiving signals from the alarm sensor.  
Camera 1  
Camera 2  
AUDIO IN  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
VIDEO IN  
THRU OUT  
SCSI  
CAUTION  
AUDIO OUT  
VIDEO OUT  
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK  
DO NOT OPEN  
LAN  
1
2
1
2
AVIS:RISQUE DE CHOC  
ELECTRIQ  
RS-232C  
UPS  
1
4/ 16  
12  
5
8
AC IN  
(220V–240V  
)
SIGNAL GND  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11 13 15 RST COM  
IN  
IN  
EXT REC  
CLK SER  
WAR RST REC  
OUT OUT OUT  
10 12 14 16 OUT  
ALARM  
9
13 16  
COM  
EE OUT  
Camera 16  
[ALARM IN]  
[COM]  
Power Cord  
(Supplied with this equipment)  
AC 220 V - 240 V  
50 Hz/60 Hz  
[AUDIO IN]  
[VIDEO IN]  
[VIDEO IN]  
Monitor 4 Monitor 5  
Alarm Sensor Monitor 2 Monitor 3  
External Hard Disk  
Drive  
Monitor 1  
Computer  
Control (Communication) Terminal  
AC 220 V - 240 V Output  
AC 220 V - 240 V  
Notes  
AC 220 V - 240 V  
Output  
UPS  
• Please consult the sales outlet from which this equipment is purchased on the type of UPS  
units that are compatible with this equipment.  
• Consult the outlet from which this equipment is purchased on the types of usable external  
HDDs.  
Caution  
• Do not connect CCU’s [CAMERA INPUT] to VR-716’s [VIDEO IN]. Doing so may damage the input circuit of VR-716.  
• When this equipment is connected to CCU, “NO VIDEO IN ** INPUT (E-03)” will be displayed on the screen if error occurs  
during signal input. (** indicates the Camera No.) Recording cannot be properly performed in such a state at both the camera  
for which error has occurred as well as at other properly functioning cameras. In this case, set the REC MODE of the camera  
channel for which error has occurred to “OFF” on the menu, and eliminate the cause of the error immediately.  
Page 24 ‘REC MODE Menu’  
Turn OFF the power of all devices before connecting or disconnecting.  
• For channels that are not connected to cameras, set them to “OFFon the “REC MODE” Menu.Page 24REC MODE Menu’  
• When [THRU OUT] is connected with the [BNC] connector, the built-in 75 ¸ terminal will be left OPEN. In this case, connect  
a 75 ¸ terminal to the last device.  
• For connection of devices other than VR-716, please refer to the respective instruction manuals for details.  
• Please refer to Page 73 ‘Connecting to a PC’ for connection with computers.  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mounting to a Rack  
Make use of the rack-mounting bracket provided when mounting VR-716 to the EIA rack.  
1
1.  
Mount the rack-mounting bracket to VR-716 us-  
ing Screw 1  
3
• Fasten the two sides of VR-716 using the 4 screws provided (M4 x 10  
mm).  
Rack-mounting  
Bracket  
3
1
2.  
Remove Screw 2 (4 corners) on the foot stand at  
the bottom surface of the equipment  
• Remove the foot stand.  
2 (4 corners)  
Caution  
• Do not place any object onVR-716 that has  
been mounted onto the rack. This may  
cause the rack to give way and lead to inju-  
ries or equipment damages.  
• When mounting 2 or more VR-716 record-  
ers on racks, ensure that they are mounted  
at least 1 unit away from one another.  
3.  
Mount VR-716 to the rack using Screw 3  
• Fasten the equipment to the rack using the 4 screws provided (M5 x 10  
mm).  
Turning On/Off the Power  
Turning ON the Power  
Notes  
• Refer to page 62External Hard Disk Drives’  
when adding external HDDs.  
• Operation of power is disabled during sys-  
tem checks.  
Do so after the “SYSTEM CHECKING...  
PLEASE WAIT…” display disappears.  
1.  
Connect the power cord  
• Use the power cord supplied to connect to an AC 220 V - 240 V, 50 Hz/  
60 Hz outlet.  
• This turns ON the power and starts the system check.  
<Monitor>  
Caution  
Turn ON the power of this equipment only  
after connections with all peripheral devices  
are completed.  
SYSTEM CHECKING...  
PLEASE WAIT...  
• Do not unplug the power cord when start-  
ing up this equipment. This may cause the  
equipment to malfunction.  
<Front Display>  
[OPERATE]  
HDD  
OPERATE  
CANCEL  
SEARCH  
MENU  
1
3
2
4
ALARM  
5
7
6
REV  
FWD  
SENSOR  
ALARM  
8
TIMER  
LOCK  
SENSOR  
9
10  
1
ALARM  
13  
15  
14  
16  
OUT  
VIDEO  
SENSOR  
DISPLAY  
EXECUTE  
AUDIO  
SEQUENCE  
MULTI  
REC  
STOP  
PLAY  
STILL  
11  
ALARM  
SKIP  
Turning OFF the Power  
Press the [OPERATE] button for about 2 seconds  
SENSOR  
Front Display  
1.  
Note  
• The front display shows [BUSY] and switches to a dim clock display.  
(OFF State)  
• Press the [OPERATE] button once when in  
the OFF state to turn ON the power.  
<Front Display>  
OPERATE  
Caution  
• Unplug the power cord only when the power  
of the equipment is OFF. If the power cord  
is unplugged when the equipment is in ON  
state, it will take time to perform a hard disk  
check when it is turned on again.It may take  
a long time when the data is fragmented or  
when there is a large amount of recorded  
data.  
2.  
Unplug the power cord  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation and Preparation (continued)  
Setting the Date/Time  
Onscreen Setting Using the Monitor Screen  
Set the date and time on the monitor screen.  
TIME ZONE Setting  
1.  
1.  
Press the [MENU] button  
• This displays the “MAIN MENU/OP-  
ERATION MENU” screen on the moni-  
HDD  
FWD  
OPERATE  
SEARCH  
MENU  
REV  
Menu Screen  
LOCK  
OUT  
tor.  
MAIN MENU/OPERATION MENU  
CLOCK SET  
MENU  
EXECUTE  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
ONSCREEN MODE  
FDP/BUZZER  
REC MODE  
SKIP  
CAMERA TITLE  
OPERATION/EXT REC  
MONITOR DISPLAY  
ALARM SENSOR MODE  
PROGRAM TIMER  
NETWORK  
2.3. 4. 3.  
DISK UTILITY/MAINTENANCE  
2.  
Select the “CLOCK SET”  
item using [ ] and  
press [  
/
]
• Move the cursor to select.  
3.  
Press [  
and select using the jog dial  
] to move the cursor to “TIME ZONE”  
Turn the jog dial to select the region that  
CLOCK SET  
you reside in.  
D
15  
M
07  
Y
2003  
H
12  
M
28  
TIME ZONE  
US/Michigan  
US/Mountain  
US/Pacific  
US/Samoa  
UTC  
REV  
FWD  
**************  
**************  
**************  
**************  
<= :RETURN  
[EXEC]:REGISTER  
Note  
• The order of D/M/Y will change in accor-  
dance with the “DATE DISPLAY” setting in  
the “ONSCREEN MODE” menu.  
4.  
Press [EXECUTE] to display the confirmation  
screen  
• It will restart automatically and “TIME ZONE” will be set when pressing  
[EXECUTE] again.  
Confirmation screen  
EXECUTE  
Caution  
• Pay attention when changing dates if the  
hard disk contains recorded data.  
Playback, Skip Jump or Direct Jump by  
Date/Time may not properly function if there  
is overlap in the recording dates.  
• Date/Time setting is disabled when in the  
Recording mode.  
TIME ZONE SETTING  
UTC  
RESTART, AFTER TIME ZONE SETTING.  
START?  
[CANCEL]:CANCEL  
[EXEC]:START  
• Refer to the notes related to SummerTime.  
(Page 116)  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
U
Clock Setting  
Press the [MENU] button  
5. 10.  
5.  
HDD  
FWD  
OPERATE  
SEARCH  
MENU  
REV  
• This displays the “MAIN MENU/OP-  
ERATION MENU” screen on the moni-  
Menu Screen  
LOCK  
OUT  
tor.  
MAIN MENU/OPERATION MENU  
CLOCK SET  
MENU  
EXECUTE  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
ONSCREEN MODE  
FDP/BUZZER  
REC MODE  
SKIP  
CAMERA TITLE  
OPERATION/EXT REC  
MONITOR DISPLAY  
ALARM SENSOR MODE  
PROGRAM TIMER  
NETWORK  
6.7.8.9.  
7.8.  
DISK UTILITY/MAINTENANCE  
6.  
Select the “CLOCK SET”  
item using [  
/
]
• Move the cursor to select.  
7.  
Press [  
] to move the cursor to “CLOCK SET”  
and turn the jog dial to adjust “D” (Day)  
Turn the jog dial to increase/decrease  
CLOCK SET  
the value.  
D
15  
M
07  
Y
2003  
H
12  
M
28  
REV  
FWD  
TIME ZONE: UTC  
<= :RETURN  
8.  
Press [  
(Month)  
] and turn the jog dial to adjust “M”  
• Repeat Step 8 to adjust the “Y” (Year),  
“H” (Hour) and “M” (Minute) values ac-  
cordingly.  
CLOCK SET  
D
15  
M
07  
Y
2003  
H
12  
M
28  
TIME ZONE: UTC  
<= :RETURN  
REV  
FWD  
9.  
Press [  
• Press [  
MENU/OPERATION MENU” screen.  
] to move the cursor to “RETURN”  
] to return to the “MAIN  
CLOCK SET  
D
15  
M
07  
Y
2003  
H
12  
M
28  
TIME ZONE: UTC  
<= :RETURN  
10.Press [MENU] to end setting  
• The display returns to the normal screen.  
MENU  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation and Preparation (continued)  
Setting the Date/Time  
Setting Using the Front Display  
Set the date/time on the front display of VR-716.  
1.  
Press the [DISPLAY] button for 2 seconds or  
longer  
Caution  
• Ensure to set the TIME ZONE before set-  
ting the Date/ Time.  
• The “D” (Day) item on the front display will start to blink.  
DISPLAY  
HDD  
OP
CANCEL  
SEARCH  
MENU  
Note  
REV  
FWD  
• Date/Time setting is disabled when VR-716 is in the Recording mode.  
TIMER  
L
DISPLAY  
EXECUTE  
VIDEO  
U  
STILL  
SKIP  
2.  
Turn the jog dial to adjust “D” (Day)  
REV  
FWD  
1.7. 3.4.5.6. 2.3.4.6.  
3.  
4.  
5.  
Press [  
] to move the blinking cursor to “M”  
and turn the jog dial to adjust the month  
REV  
FWD  
Press [  
] to move the blinking cursor toYand  
turn the jog dial to adjust the year  
REV  
FWD  
Notes  
When adjusting the seconds:  
• Press and hold the [LOCK] button followed  
by pressing the [STOP] button to adjust the  
seconds of the clock.  
• When the value is 29 seconds or less, this  
will be reset to 00 seconds with the minute  
value unchanged.  
Press the [  
] button  
• The hour and minute values will be displayed on the front display but  
only the hour value blinks.  
• When the value is 30 seconds and above,  
this will be reset to 00 seconds with the  
minute rounded to the next higher value.  
• The order of D/M/Y will change in accor-  
dance with the “DATE DISPLAY” setting in  
the “ONSCREEN MODE” menu.  
6.  
Adjust “H” (Hour) and “M” (Minute)  
• Repeat Steps 3 ~ 4 to adjust the hour and minute values.  
Caution  
• Pay attention when changing dates if the  
hard disk contains recorded data.  
Playback, Skip Jump or Direct Jump by  
Date/Time may not properly function if there  
is overlap in the recording dates.  
• The “TIME ZONE” item cannot be altered  
on the front display.  
7.  
Press the [DISPLAY] button  
• This sets and starts the clock.  
DISPLAY  
• Refer to the notes related to SummerTime.  
(Page 116)  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Onscreen Display  
VR-716 allows the onscreen display of Date/Time, Alarm (Sensor) No. and the operational state on the monitor.  
Changing Position of Onscreen Display  
<Onscreen Display>  
1.  
Press and hold the [EXECUTE] button for a while  
Day-Month-Year  
Day of the Week  
• The monitor screen switches  
to the Onscreen Display Po-  
sition Adjustment mode.  
• Background color of the  
‘Date/Time Display’ turns  
blue.  
Time  
(24-hour Display)  
‘Date/Time  
Display’  
01-03-2003 SA 12:34:56  
DATE/TIME  
Alarm (Sensor)  
Detection (Blinks)  
60%  
AL 3  
AL  
*
Playback Direction  
(Operational State)  
Alarm (Sensor) No.  
Camera Title  
‘Title  
Display’  
EXECUTE  
SLOW  
TITLE  
Remaining Hard Disk Space (Blinks when reached 0%)  
Press and hold  
• Alarm (Sensor) No. display includes the fol-  
lowing:  
[AL]  
: The largest alarm (sensor) no.  
registered  
2.  
Move using the [  
• The position can be moved diagonally by pressing buttons simultaneously.  
/
/
/
] buttons  
[AL *] : Alarm (Sensor) No. of playback  
image  
[AL * P] : Presensor No. of playback image  
Onscreen display settings can be specified on  
the “ONSCREEN MODE” Menu. (Page 23)  
• Move the ‘Date/Time Display’ to any posi-  
tion.  
• However, it cannot be shifted to the ‘Warn-  
ing Display Area’.  
‘Warning  
Display  
Area’  
Notes  
‘Date/Time  
Display’  
DATE/TIME  
• When in the Onscreen Display Position  
Adjustment mode, background of theDate/  
Time Displayand ‘Title Displaywill appear  
in blue alternately every time the [EX-  
ECUTE] button is pressed.  
Alteration of display position is possible  
when the background is shown in blue.  
• Priority will be given to the ‘Date Time Dis-  
play’ if it overlaps with the ‘Title Display’.  
TITLE  
3.  
Press the [EXECUTE] button  
• The ‘Title Display’ turns blue and is now in  
the Onscreen Display Position Adjustment  
mode.  
<Adjustment of Onscreen Display  
Position When in Quad Picture>  
EXECUTE  
DATE/TIME  
‘Title  
Display’  
TITLE  
DATE/TIME  
1
2
TITLE 1  
TITLE 2  
3
4.  
Move using the [  
• The position can be moved diagonally by pressing buttons simultaneously.  
• Move the ‘Title Display’ to any position.  
/
/
/
] buttons  
Warning  
Display  
Area  
TITLE 3  
TITLE 4  
4
5
• However, it cannot be shifted to the ‘Warning Display Area’.  
• The displayed characters will shift to the  
left, right or center automatically.  
• Press and hold the [EXECUTE] button for  
a while when in Quad Picture to switch to  
the Onscreen Display Adjustment Screen  
as shown in the above diagram.  
• Adjust display position in the same way as  
described in Steps 1 ~ 5.  
‘Warning  
Display  
Area’  
DATE/TIME  
‘Title  
Display’  
TITLE  
• Background of the respective displays will  
turn blue in the following order every time  
when the [EXECUTE] button is pressed:  
1 “DATE/TIME”  
2 “TITLE 1”  
3 “TITLE 2”  
5.  
Press the [CANCEL] button  
• This confirms the onscreen display position  
and returns the display to the normal screen.  
4 “TITLE 3”  
5 “TITLE 4”  
CANCEL  
• The ‘Date/Time Display’ and ‘Title Display’  
cannot be moved to the Warning Display  
Area.  
AL 3  
60%  
*
SLOW  
AL  
01-03-2003 SA 12:34:56  
• Camera titles are not shown during display  
in 16 split pictures.  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menus  
Menu Flow Chart  
Menu Screen  
MAIN MENU/OPERATION MENU  
CLOCK SET  
ONSCREEN MODE  
FDP/BUZZER  
REC MODE  
“CLOCK SET” Menu  
“CAMERA TITLE” Menu  
CAMERA TITLE  
OPERATION/EXT REC  
MONITOR DISPLAY  
ALARM SENSOR MODE  
PROGRAM TIMER  
NETWORK  
CLOCK SET  
CAMERA TITLE  
1.BLOCK  
2.CAMERA 1  
3.CAMERA 2  
4.CAMERA 3  
5.CAMERA 4  
D
15  
M
07  
Y
2003  
H
12  
M
28  
1
TITLE  
TITLE  
TITLE  
TITLE  
(NONE)  
(NONE)  
(NONE)  
(NONE)  
DISK UTILITY/MAINTENANCE  
TIME ZONE: UTC  
<= :RETURN  
<= :RETURN  
(Page 16)  
(Page 25)  
“OPERATION/EXT REC” Menu  
“ONSCREEN MODE” Menu  
OPERATION/EXT REC  
[ OPERATION ]  
1.RECOVERY REC  
2.REPEAT REC  
3.LANGUAGE SELECTION  
4.WATER MARK  
5.OPERATION LOCK  
[EXT REC]  
1.EXT REC MODE  
2.SERIES REC  
ONSCREEN MODE  
1.DATE/TIME  
ON  
PRIOR STATE  
OFF  
ENGLISH  
OFF  
2.PLAYBACK MODE  
3.TITLE  
4.ALARM/SENSOR COUNT  
5.DISK CAPACITY  
6.ALARM/SENSOR DETECT  
7.WARNING  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ALL  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
8.BACKGROUND COLOR  
9.DATE DISPLAY  
BLACK  
D/M/Y  
(Pages 25)  
(Page 23)  
“FDP/BUZZER” Menu  
“MONITOR DISPLAY” Menu  
MONITOR DISPLAY  
1.EE OUT 1-4/-16  
FDP/BUZZER  
[ FDP ]  
1.ALARM/SENSOR MODE  
2.ALARM/SENSOR BLINK  
3.SEQUENCIAL MONITOR  
4.INPUT SIGNAL ERROR  
5.WARNING  
[BUZZER]  
1.HDD FULL  
2.ALARM/SENSOR  
3.WARNING  
1-4  
2.SINGLE PICTURE MODE  
3.QUAD PICTURE MODE  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
BLOCK 1  
1SEC  
1SEC  
1SEC  
1SEC  
OFF  
BLOCK 2  
BLOCK 3  
BLOCK 4  
4.ALARM/SENSOR SWITCH  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
5.SPLIT SCREEN BORDER COLOR BORDER 3  
(Page 26)  
(Pages 23, 24)  
“REC MODE” Menu  
“ALARM/SENSOR MODE” Menu  
REC MODE  
ALARM/SENSOR MODE  
1.BLOCK  
1
1.BLOCK  
2.REC MODE  
3.FRAME RATE  
4.QUALITY  
5.DURATION  
6.AUDIO REC  
7.PRESENSOR REC  
8.PRESENSOR REC DURATION  
9.EXT INPUT OPERATING MODE  
10.MOTION DETECT  
11.MOTION DETECT SETTING  
1
ALARM  
25 IPS  
H
180SEC  
ON  
OFF  
10SEC  
OFF  
OFF  
2.CAMERA 1  
3.CAMERA 2  
4.CAMERA 3  
5.CAMERA 4  
6.FRAME RATE  
7.REC QUALITY  
8.AUDIO REC  
RECORDABLE HOUR  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
25 IPS  
H
ON  
APPROX. 38H  
(Pages 27, 28)  
(Page 24)  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
“PROGRAM TIMER” Menu  
“WEEKLY TIMER” Menu  
PROGRAM TIMER  
1.WEEKLY TIMER  
2.DATE TIMER  
WEEKLY TIMER  
START END CAM1-4 CAM5-8 CAM9-12 CAM13-16 EXEC  
SUN  
MON  
TUE  
WED  
THU  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
3.AFTER RELEASE  
CONTINUE  
FRI  
SAT  
DAY  
SUN MON TUE  
WED THU FRI  
SAT  
<= :RETURN  
[CANCEL]:CANCEL  
(Page 29)  
“DATE TIMER” Menu  
(Pages 29, 30)  
DATE TIMER  
START END CAM1-4 CAM5-8 CAM9-12 CAM13-16 EXEC  
“NETWORK” Menu  
** **  
1.  
** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
9.  
-
-
** **  
** **  
10.  
11.  
12.  
13.  
14.  
15.  
16.  
2.  
-
-
“DEFRAG DATABASE” Menu  
NETWORK  
1.HOST NAME  
2.METHOD  
3.IP ADDRESS  
4.NET MASK  
5.DEFAULT GATEWAY  
6.NAME SERVER  
** **  
** **  
3.  
-
-
vr716  
STATIC  
192.168. 0. 10  
255.255.255.  
192.168. 0.254  
0. 0. 0.  
** **  
** **  
4.  
-
-
** **  
** **  
5.  
-
-
** **  
** **  
DEFRAG DATABASE  
DATE TIME SET  
6.  
-
-
0
** **  
** **  
-
-
7.  
** **  
** **  
DEFRAG AUTO MODE  
01  
00 OFF  
YES  
-
-
8.  
** **  
** **  
0
<= :RETURN  
[CANCEL]:CANCEL  
00:80:88:40:b0:00  
MAC ADDRESS  
DEFRAG  
(Page 30)  
<= :RETURN  
[CANCEL]:DELETE  
SET [YES] FOR DEFRAG  
<= :RETURN  
[EXEC]:DEFRAG  
(Page 31)  
“DISK UTILITY” Menu  
(Page 57)  
DISK UTILITY  
1.AUTO SCAN DISK  
2.MANUAL SCAN DISK  
3.DEFRAG DATABASE  
4.FORMAT  
OFF  
OFF  
“DISK UTILITY/MAINTENANCE” Menu  
“FORMAT” Menu  
DISK UTILITY/MAINTENANCE  
1.DISK UTILITY  
5.MIRRORING  
FORMAT  
2.MAINTENANCE  
BUILT-IN HDD 1 :  
BUILT-IN HDD 2 :  
EXTERNAL HDD 1 :  
EXTERNAL HDD 2 :  
EXTERNAL HDD 3 :  
EXTERNAL HDD 4 :  
START FORMAT  
76GB OK  
76GB OK  
YES  
YES  
NO  
(Pages 31, 55)  
ALL RECORDED HDD DATA IS DELETED!!  
1.SET FORMATTING HDD TO [YES]  
2.SET START FORMAT TO [YES]  
“MAINTENANCE” Menu  
(Page 31)  
(Page 58)  
“MIRRORING” Menu  
MAINTENANCE  
1.TOTAL TIME  
2.POWER OUTAGE TIME LIST  
PL-1  
22H  
10/07/2003 TH 10:47  
“SINGLE PICTURE MODE” Menu  
:
PL-  
**********  
PL-  
**********  
PL-  
**********  
/
/
** ** **** ** ** **  
:
/
/
** ** **** ** ** **  
:
/
/
MIRRORING  
** ** **** ** ** **  
SINGLE PICTURE MODE  
BUILT-IN HDD 1 :  
BUILT-IN HDD 2 :  
76GB OK  
76GB OK  
9.CAMERA 9  
1SEC  
1.CAMERA 1 1SEC  
2.CAMERA 2 1SEC  
3.CAMERA 3 1SEC  
4.CAMERA 4 1SEC  
5.CAMERA 5 1SEC  
6.CAMERA 6 1SEC  
7.CAMERA 7 1SEC  
8.CAMERA 8 1SEC  
10.CAMERA 10 1SEC  
11.CAMERA 11 1SEC  
12.CAMERA 12 1SEC  
13.CAMERA 13 1SEC  
14.CAMERA 14 1SEC  
15.CAMERA 15 1SEC  
16.CAMERA 16 1SEC  
NO  
MIRRORING SETTING  
[CANCEL]:LIST CLEAR  
ALL HDD DATA WILL BE DELETED!!  
NO MIRRORING SETTING  
SET [YES] FOR MIRRORING SETTING  
(Pages 31, 60)  
<= :RETURN  
[EXEC]:START MIRROR  
“DETAIL SETTING” Menu  
(Pages 59, 60)  
(Page 26)  
DETAIL SETTING  
1.DETECTING SENSITIVITY  
2.TERMINATION SENSITIVITY  
3.OBJECT SIZE LEVEL  
7
+3  
2
“MOTION DETECT SETTING” Menu  
(Pages 28)  
“CAMERA AREA SETTING” Menu  
CAMERA2 AREA SETTING  
MOTION DETECT SETTING  
1.BLOCK  
2.CAMERA 1 SCENE  
AREA SETTING  
3.CAMERA 2 SCENE  
AREA SETTING  
4.CAMERA 3 SCENE  
AREA SETTING  
1
MANUAL  
MANUAL  
MANUAL  
MANUAL  
5.CAMERA 4 SCENE  
AREA SETTING  
[CANCEL] :CANCEL AREA [EXEC] :SET AREA  
[CANCEL]HOLD:DELETE ALL  
[EXEC]HOLD:SET ALL  
[SEARCH]HOLD:CHECK MODE  
[SEARCH]:CHECK MODE CLEAR  
(Page 28)  
(Pages 68, 69)  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menus (continued)  
Changing Menu Settings  
Changing Initial Settings  
Change the VR-716 preset values (Factory settings) during purchase according to its use.  
Connect the monitor for which the menu  
screen is to be displayed to the [VIDEO OUT]  
terminal. (Page 33)  
1.  
Press the [MENU] button  
• This displays the “MAIN MENU/OPERATION MENU” screen on the  
monitor.  
MENU  
1.6.  
MAIN MENU/OPERATION MENU  
CLOCK SET  
ONSCREEN MODE  
FDP/BUZZER  
REC MODE  
CAMERA TITLE  
HDD  
FWD  
OPERATE  
E
SEARCH  
MENU  
REV  
OPERATION/EXT REC  
MONITOR DISPLAY  
ALARM SENSOR MODE  
PROGRAM TIMER  
NETWORK  
R
LOCK  
OUT  
2.  
Select menu item using  
DISK UTILITY/MAINTENANCE  
A
EXECUTE  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
[
/
]
SKIP  
• Move the cursor to select.  
2.3.4.  
5.  
3.  
Press the [  
• The settings are displayed.  
] button  
ONSCREEN MODE  
1.DATE/TIME  
2.PLAYBACK MODE  
3.TITLE  
4.ALARM/SENSOR COUNT  
5.DISK CAPACITY  
6.ALARM/SENSOR DETECT  
7.WARNING  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
8.BACKGROUND COLOR  
9.DATE DISPLAY  
BLACK  
D/M/Y  
Notes  
• Changes can be made to items in the follow-  
ing menus when in the Recording mode:  
• “ONSCREEN MODE” (excluding DATE  
DISPLAY) (Page 23)  
• “FDP” (Page 23)  
• “BUZZER” (Page 24)  
4.  
Select menu item using [  
• Move the cursor to select.  
/
]
ONSCREEN MODE  
1.DATE/TIME  
2.PLAYBACK MODE  
3.TITLE  
4.ALARM/SENSOR COUNT  
5.DISK CAPACITY  
6.ALARM/SENSOR DETECT  
7.WARNING  
8.BACKGROUND COLOR  
9.DATE DISPLAY  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
• “MONITOR DISPLAY” (Page 26)  
• “SEARCH MENU”  
BLACK  
D/M/Y  
• Menu operation is disabled when in the Timer  
mode.  
• Values that have been altered will be written  
into the memory when exiting the menu screen.  
Do not continue using with the altered menu  
screens left open.  
5.  
6.  
Turn the jog dial to select a value  
ONSCREEN MODE  
1.DATE/TIME  
REV  
FWD  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
BLACK  
D/M/Y  
2.PLAYBACK MODE  
3.TITLE  
4.ALARM/SENSOR COUNT  
5.DISK CAPACITY  
6.ALARM/SENSOR DETECT  
7.WARNING  
8.BACKGROUND COLOR  
9.DATE DISPLAY  
Press [MENU] to end setting  
• The display returns to the normal screen.  
MENU  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
“ONSCREEN MODE” Menu  
[ ] are factory settings.  
Item  
Settings  
Description  
For setting the Day/Month/Year and clock’s onscreen display.  
“ON”  
“OFF”  
“DATE/TIME”  
“ON”  
: Date/time displayed.  
: Date/time not displayed.  
“OFF”  
For setting the onscreen display of the Playback mode.  
“ON”  
“OFF”  
“PLAYBACK MODE”  
“TITLE”  
“ON”  
“OFF”  
: Playback mode displayed.  
: Playback mode not displayed.  
For setting the onscreen display of camera channel titles.  
“ON”  
“OFF”  
“ON”  
“OFF”  
: Title displayed.  
: Title not displayed.  
For setting the onscreen display of Alarm/Sensor Nos.  
“ON”  
“OFF”  
“ALARM/SENSOR  
COUNT”  
“ON”  
: Alarm/Sensor No. displayed.  
: Alarm/Sensor No. not displayed.  
“OFF”  
For setting the onscreen display of the remaining hard disk space.  
“ON”  
“OFF”  
“DISK CAPACITY”  
“ON”  
: Remaining disk space displayed. (Display is not shown when in the  
Repeat Record mode.)  
“OFF”  
: Remaining disk space not displayed.  
For setting whether to display the [AL] mark onscreen during alarm/sensor recording.  
“ON”  
“OFF”  
“ALARM/SENSOR  
DETECT”  
“ON”  
: [AL] mark displayed.  
: [AL] mark not displayed.  
“OFF”  
For setting whether to display warning onscreen during error.  
“ON”  
“OFF”  
“WARNING”  
“ON”  
: Warning displayed.  
: Warning not displayed.  
“OFF”  
For setting the background of the settings menu screen.  
“BLACK”  
“CLEAR”  
“BACKGROUND  
COLOR”  
“BLACK”  
“CLEAR”  
: Displays background in black.  
: Displays live camera images or playback images.  
For changing the order of date display.  
“D/M/Y”  
“Y/M/D”  
“M/D/Y”  
“DATE DISPLAY”  
“FDP” Menu  
[ ] are factory settings.  
Item  
Settings  
Description  
For setting whether to light up the [AL] (alarm) Indicator 6 (Page 12) on the front  
display during alarm/sensor recording.  
“ON”  
“OFF”  
“ALARM/SENSOR  
MODE”  
“ON”  
: Indicator lights up.  
“OFF”  
: Indicator does not light up.  
Page 12 ‘Names and Functions (Front Display)’  
For setting whether to blink the [AL] (alarm) Indicator 6 (Page 12) on the front  
display upon completion of alarm/sensor recording.  
“ON”  
“OFF”  
“ALARM/SENSOR  
BLINK”  
“ON”  
: Indicator blinks.  
“OFF”  
: Indicator does not blink.  
Page 12 ‘Names and Functions (Front Display)’  
For setting whether to turn on the LED for the camera selection button 6 (Page 7)  
“ON”  
“OFF”  
“SEQUENTIAL  
MONITOR”  
on the front panel.  
“ON”  
: LED of the camera selection button that corresponds to the Cam-  
era No. on the monitor screen turns on.  
“OFF”  
: LED of the camera selection button that corresponds to the Cam-  
era No.on the monitor screen does not turn on.However, LED lights  
up when displaying in 16 split pictures.  
For setting the mode of illumination of the camera selection button LED 6 (Page 7)  
on the front panel when signal error occurs at the camera.  
“ON”  
“OFF”  
“INPUT SIGNAL  
ERROR”  
“ON”  
: Blinks when “ON” is selected for the camera in the “REC MODE”  
Menu but there are no camera signals, or when SINGLE PICTURE  
is selected using the camera selection button and “OFF” is selected  
for the specified camera in the “REC MODE” Menu.  
: LED does not blink.  
“OFF”  
The setting of “INPUT SIGNAL ERROR” on the front display is different from what  
is displayed onscreen.  
For setting whether to display warning on the front display during error.  
“ON”  
“OFF”  
“WARNING”  
“ON”  
: Warning displayed.  
: Warning not displayed.  
“OFF”  
Page 105 ‘Problems Related to Error Code and Onscreen Display’  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menus (continued)  
“BUZZER” Menu  
[ ] are factory settings.  
Item  
Settings  
Description  
For setting whether to sound the buzzer when the hard disk has no more space  
during recording.  
“ON”  
“OFF”  
“HDD FULL”  
“ON”  
: The buzzer sounds.  
“OFF”  
: The buzzer does not sound.  
For setting whether to sound buzzer during alarm/sensor recording.  
“ON”  
“OFF”  
“ALARM/SENSOR”  
“WARNING”  
“ON”  
“OFF”  
: The buzzer sounds.  
: The buzzer does not sound.  
For setting whether to sound buzzer when error occurs.  
“ON”  
“OFF”  
“ON”  
“OFF”  
: The buzzer sounds.  
: The buzzer does not sound.  
Page 105 ‘Problems Related to Error Code and Onscreen Display’  
“REC MODE” Menu  
[ ] are factory settings. (Setting is disabled when in the Recording mode.)  
Item Settings  
Description  
For selecting the camera channel block for which “REC MODE” setting is to be per-  
formed.  
1 : Sets to Camera Channels 1 - 4.  
2 : Sets to Camera Channels 5 - 8.  
3 : Sets to Camera Channels 9 - 12.  
4 : Sets to Camera Channels 13 - 16.  
1  
2
3
“BLOCK”  
4
For selecting the camera to perform recording.  
“ON”  
“OFF”  
“CAMERA 1” ~  
“CAMERA 4”  
(When “BLOCK 1” is  
selected)  
“ON”  
“OFF”  
: Recording enabled.  
: Recording disabled.  
Note  
• Menu items vary according to the block selected. “BLOCK 2”: “CAMERA 5” ~  
“CAMERA 8”, “BLOCK 3”: “CAMERA 9” ~ “CAMERA 12”, “BLOCK 4”: “CAM-  
ERA 13” ~ “CAMERA 16”.  
“25 IPS”  
“12.5 IPS”  
“8.3 IPS”  
“4.2 IPS”  
“2.5 IPS”  
“1.7 IPS”  
“1 IPS”  
“FRAME RATE”  
For setting the no. of frames to be recorded.  
Note  
• “AUDIO REC” switches automatically to “OFF” when “1/6 IPS” (1 image per 6  
seconds) or “1/12 IPS(1 image per 12 seconds) is selected for “FRAME RATE”.  
“1/2 IPS”  
“1/6 IPS”  
“1/12 IPS”  
“H”  
“N”  
“B”  
“REC QUALITY”  
“AUDIO REC”  
For setting the picture quality of the image to be recorded.  
“H” : HIGH (High picture quality)  
“N” : NORMAL (Normal picture quality)  
“B” : BASIC (Basic picture quality)  
L” : LONG (Long-play quality)  
L”  
For setting whether to record audio signals.  
“ON”  
“OFF”  
“ON”  
“OFF”  
: Audio signals recorded.  
: Audio signals not recorded.  
Note  
• Switches automatically to “OFF” when “1/6 IPS” (1 image per 6 seconds) or “1/  
12 IPS” (1 image per 12 seconds) is selected for “FRAME RATE” in the menu.  
“RECORDABLE  
HOUR”  
Displays the remaining amount of time for which recording is possible at the hard  
disk.  
- - - - -  
Note  
• Length of recordable time varies with the settings of the “FRAME RATE”, “REC  
QUALITY” and “AUDIO REC” items. Page 115 ‘Recording Duration’  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
“CAMERA TITLE” Menu  
[ ] are factory settings. (Setting is disabled when in the Recording mode.)  
Item  
Settings  
Description  
Camera Channels 1 - 16 can be named separately.  
Page 72 ‘Setting a Title for Each Camera Channel Screen’  
**********  
“CAMERA 1” ~  
“CAMERA 16”  
“OPERATION” Menu  
[ ] are factory settings. (Setting is disabled when in the Recording mode.)  
Item  
Settings  
Description  
“OFF”  
“PRIOR STATE”  
“NORMAL REC”  
“RECOVERY REC”  
For setting whether to perform Recovery Recording.  
“OFF”  
: Switches to the Stop mode upon restoration from power failure.(Switches  
to the Timer mode upon restoration if the Program Timer is set.)  
“PRIOR STATE” : Re-starts recording upon restoration from power failure, only when  
power failure occurs during recording.  
“NORMAL REC” : Re-starts recording upon restoration from power failure.  
Page 71 ‘Continuing with Recording Upon Recovery from Power Failure’  
“OFF”  
“REPEAT REC”  
For setting whether to perform Repeat Recording.  
“ALARM STOP”  
“ALARM LOCK”  
“ALL”  
“OFF”  
: Repeat recording disabled.  
“ALARM STOP” : Repeat Recording mode is disabled if alarm recording has been executed.  
“ALARM LOCK” : Alarm recording is basically protected from overwriting during re-  
peat recording, but images other than alarm recording may remain  
if the hard disk space is filled up mostly by Alarm recording.  
: When there is insufficient hard disk space, previous recordings are  
overwritten, starting from the oldest recording.  
“ALL”  
Page 112 ‘Repeat Record’  
“ENGLISH”  
“GERMAN”  
“FRENCH”  
“ITALIAN”  
“LANGUAGE SELEC-  
TION”  
For selecting a language displayed in the menu.  
“SPANISH”  
“ON”  
“OFF”  
“WATER MARK”  
For setting whether to embed water mark in the recorded images.  
“ON”  
: Records images with embedded water mark.  
: Records images without embedded water mark.  
“OFF”  
Notes  
• When in the 1 input per block mode, water mark will not be recorded depending  
on the setting.  
Refer to the following table. ( : recordable, : not recordable)  
FRAME RATE (IPS)  
25 12.5 8.3 4.2 2.5 1.7  
1
1/2 1/6 1/12  
H
N
B
L
REC  
QUALITY  
• For details on water mark detection, please refer to the application software  
[VR-716 Player] Manual (CD-ROM) provided.  
“ALL”  
“STOP REC”  
“OPERATION LOCK”  
For setting the lock operation when the operation lock is ON.  
“ALL”  
: Disables all operations.  
“STOP REC”  
: Disables operation to start or stop recording.  
“EXT REC” Menu  
[ ] are factory settings. (Setting is disabled when in the Recording mode.)  
Item  
Settings  
Description  
“OFF”  
“TRIGGER”  
“MANUAL”  
For setting whether to start automatic recording when external signals are received  
at the [EXT REC IN] of the signal input/output terminal.  
“EXT REC MODE”  
“OFF”  
: Automatic recording not executed.  
“TRIGGER”  
“MANUAL”  
: Starts recording upon receiving external signals.  
: Continues recording when external signals are input.  
Page 61 ‘Activation of Recording Via External Signals’  
“ON”  
“OFF”  
For setting whether to execute SERIES recording based on signals received at the  
[SERIES REC IN/OUT] terminal.  
“SERIES REC”  
“ON”  
“OFF”  
: Executes SERIES recording based on [SERIES REC IN/OUT] signals.  
: Does not execute SERIES recording based on [SERIES REC IN/OUT] signals.  
Page 61 ‘Series Recording Using 2 or More VR-716 Recorders’  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menus (continued)  
“MONITOR DISPLAY” Menu  
[ ] are factory settings.  
Item  
Settings  
Description  
For setting the screen during output of camera images in VR-716 to the [EE OUT  
1-4/-16] terminal.  
“1-4”  
“1-16”  
“EE OUT1 - 4/ -16”  
“1-4”  
: Images displayed in quad picture.  
: Images displayed in 16 split pictures.  
“1-16”  
Page 32 ‘When Connecting the Monitor to the [EE OUT] terminal’  
“SINGLE PICTURE  
MODE”  
For setting the time interval at which display at VR-716 is switched from the live  
image of one camera to another.  
“OFF”  
“1 SEC”  
“2 SEC”  
“3 SEC”  
“4 SEC”  
“5 SEC”  
“10 SEC”  
“SINGLE PICTURE  
MODE”  
“OFF”  
: Automatic switching of camera channels turned off.  
: Switches camera channel at an interval of 1 second.  
: Switches camera channel at an interval of 2 seconds.  
: Switches camera channel at an interval of 3 seconds.  
: Switches camera channel at an interval of 4 seconds.  
: Switches camera channel at an interval of 5 seconds.  
: Switches camera channel at an interval of 10 seconds.  
“1 SEC”  
“2 SEC”  
“3 SEC”  
“4 SEC”  
“5 SEC”  
“10 SEC”  
“CAMERA1”  
~ “CAMERA16”  
Page 34 ‘Setting Time Interval for Switching Displays in the Single Picture Mode’  
For setting the time interval at which display is switched from one camera channel  
block to another when in quad picture.  
“OFF”  
“1 SEC”  
“2 SEC”  
“3 SEC”  
“4 SEC”  
“5 SEC”  
“10 SEC”  
“QUAD PICTURE  
MODE”  
“OFF”  
: Automatic switching of camera channels turned off.  
: Switches camera channel at an interval of 1 second.  
: Switches camera channel at an interval of 2 seconds.  
: Switches camera channel at an interval of 3 seconds.  
: Switches camera channel at an interval of 4 seconds.  
: Switches camera channel at an interval of 5 seconds.  
: Switches camera channel at an interval of 10 seconds.  
“1 SEC”  
“2 SEC”  
“3 SEC”  
“4 SEC”  
“5 SEC”  
“10 SEC”  
“BLOCK 1”  
~ “BLOCK 4”  
Page 35 ‘Setting Time Interval for Switching Displays in the Quad Picture Mode’  
For setting the switching mode of the monitor screen when alarm/sensor signals are  
received.  
“OFF”  
“SEQUENTIAL”  
“FIX”  
“ALARM/SENSOR  
SWITCH”  
“OFF”  
: Sends output to monitor according to the Camera Selection button  
settings.  
“SEQUENTIAL” : Sends only output of cameras for which alarm has been triggered  
to the monitor in sequence. (Switching of display is fixed at an inter-  
val of 1 second.)  
“FIX”  
: Sends only output of the camera for which its alarm has last been  
triggered to the monitor.  
Notes  
• Screen display of monitor can be switched using the Camera Selection but-  
tons even when “SEQUENTIALor “FIX” are selected.  
• When multiple alarms are simultaneously detected, image of cameras for which  
alarm has been triggered will be output to the monitor alternately even when  
“FIX” is selected.  
For setting the brightness of the border line of split screen.  
“OFF”  
“SPLIT SCREEN  
BORDER COLOR”  
“BORDER 1”  
“BORDER 2”  
“BORDER 3”  
: Dark grey  
: Grey  
: Bright grey  
“BORDER 1”  
“BORDER 2”  
“BORDER 3”  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
“ALARM/SENSOR MODE” Menu  
This menu is used for specifying settings related to alarm or sensor recording.  
Alarm/sensor inputs are either received via the [ALARM IN] terminal at the rear panel of VR-716 or via Motion Detect.  
[ ] are factory settings. (Setting is disabled when in the Recording mode.)  
Item  
Settings  
Description  
For selecting the camera channel block for which alarm or sensor recording settings  
are to be specified.  
1 : Sets to Camera Channels 1 - 4.  
2 : Sets to Camera Channels 5 - 8.  
3 : Sets to Camera Channels 9 - 12.  
1  
2
3
“BLOCK”  
4
4 : Sets to Camera Channels 13 - 16.  
For specifying settings related to alarm and sensor recording.  
“ALARM”  
“SENSOR”  
“ALARM/SENSOR”  
“REC MODE”  
“ALARM”  
: Starts alarm recording only when VR-716 is in the normal  
recording mode.  
“SENSOR”  
: Starts sensor recording only when VR-716 is in the Stop  
mode.  
“ALARM/SENSOR” : Starts alarm recording when in the normal recording mode  
and sensor recording when in the Stop mode.  
Page 66 ‘Activation of Recording Via External Alarm/Sensor Signals’  
For setting the frame rate during alarm recording.Value is set according to the no. of  
images to record in 1 second.  
“25 IPS”  
“12.5 IPS”  
“8.3 IPS”  
“4.2 IPS”  
“FRAME RATE”  
“QUALITY”  
For setting the picture quality during alarm recording.  
“H” : HIGH (High picture quality)  
“N” : NORMAL (Normal picture quality)  
“B” : BASIC (Basic picture quality)  
L” : LONG (Long-play quality)  
“H”  
“N”  
“B”  
L”  
For setting the duration of alarm or sensor recording.  
“10 SEC” ~ “180 SEC” : Duration of alarm/sensor recording.  
“10 SEC”  
“15 SEC”  
“30 SEC”  
“DURATION”  
“MANUAL”  
: Continues alarm/sensor recording when alarm signals are  
input. (Maximum: 20 minutes)  
“60 SEC”  
In the case of alarm or sensor recording via Motion Detect,  
recording lasts for a duration of 10 seconds upon the last  
sensor detection.  
“120 SEC”  
“180 SEC”  
“MANUAL”  
For setting whether to record audio signals.  
“ON”  
“OFF”  
“AUDIO REC”  
“ON”  
: Audio signals recorded.  
: Audio signals not recorded.  
“OFF”  
For setting whether to activate presensor recording.  
Select “ON” to activate presensor recording.  
Page 113 ‘Presensor Recording’  
“ON”  
“OFF”  
“PRESENSOR REC”  
For setting the duration of presensor recording.  
“10 SEC”  
“20 SEC”  
“30 SEC”  
“PRESENSOR REC  
DURATION”  
“10 SEC” : Activates presensor recording over an interval of 10 ~ 20 seconds.  
“20 SEC” : Activates presensor recording over an interval of 20 ~ 30 seconds.  
“30 SEC” : Activates presensor recording over an interval of 30 ~ 60 seconds.  
Page 113 ‘Presensor Recording’  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menus (continued)  
“ALARM/SENSOR MODE” Menu (continued)  
[ ] are factory settings. (Setting is disabled when in the Recording mode.)  
Item  
Settings  
Description  
For setting alarm or sensor recording actions for the signal input/output terminal  
[ALARM IN] of VR-716.  
“EXT INPUT OPERAT-  
ING MODE”  
“OFF”  
“ON”  
“NORMAL”  
“TIMER”  
“OFF”  
“ON”  
: Alarm/sensor recording not activated.  
: Alarm/sensor recording activated.  
“NORMAL”  
: Alarm/sensor recording activated except when in the Timer  
Recording or Timer Standby mode.  
“TIMER”  
: Alarm/sensor recording activated when in the Timer Re-  
cording or Timer Standby mode.  
Page 66 ‘Activation of Recording Via External Alarm/Sensor Signals’  
For setting alarm or sensor recording using Motion Detect.  
“MOTION DETECT”  
“OFF”  
“ON”  
“NORMAL”  
“TIMER”  
“OFF”  
“ON”  
: Motion Detect not activated.  
: Motion Detect activated.  
“NORMAL”  
: Motion Detect activated except when the Program Timer is  
in the Standby mode.  
“TIMER”  
: Motion Detect activated when the Program Timer is in the  
Standby mode.  
Page 68 ‘Using the Motion Detect Feature’  
“MOTION DETECT  
SETTING”  
For setting the sensitivity of the Motion Detect feature.  
Sensitivity is set upon selecting an item in “SCENE”.  
“SCENE”  
“STANDARD”  
“MANUAL”  
“DOORWAY”  
PASSAGE”  
“REGISTER”  
: To detect the opening and closing of the door of building  
and shop, or people going in and out.  
: To detect the movement of people on the passageway in  
the school, corporation or shop.  
: To detect the movement of people operating the cash reg-  
ister in the shop/change machine in amusement center, or  
the change in the waiting queue.  
“DOORWAY H”  
“DOORWAY L”  
PASSAGE H”  
PASSAGE L”  
“REGISTER H”  
“REGISTER L”  
ATM H”  
ATM”  
: To detect the change in users at the entrance of ATM termi-  
nals of bank or post office.  
ATM L”  
“LOBBY H”  
“LOBBY”  
“GATE”  
: To detect the movement of people in the wide lobby.  
: To detect the opening and closing of the door at a dim en-  
trance or employee use entrance, or people going in and  
out.  
: To detect the cars going in and out of the entrance of car  
parks outside a house.  
: To detect the movement of people outside a dark house.  
: To detect the opening and closing of an elevator door, or  
people going in and out.  
: To detect the visitors going in and out at the reception of  
hotel, corporation or shop.  
“LOBBY L”  
“GATE H”  
“GATE L”  
PARKING LOT H”  
PARKING LOT L”  
“LOW LUX H”  
“LOW LUX L”  
“ELEVATOR”  
“COUNTER”  
PARKING LOT”  
“LOW LUX”  
“ELEVATOR”  
“COUNTER”  
“SCENE” setting is a reference. Please try other settings if the sensitivity does  
not suit your requirement.  
The following details can be specified when “MANUALis selected:  
“DETAIL SETTING” for each camera  
“DETECTING SENSITIVITY..................... 1 ~ 15 (Factory setting: 7)  
“TERMINATION SENSITIVITY” ................. +0 ~ 14 (Factory setting: +3)  
“OBJECT SIZE LEVEL............................. 1 ~ 10 (Factory setting: 2)  
“DETECTING SENSITIVITY” : Level for detection.The higher the value, the higher the sen-  
sitivity.  
“TERMINATION SENSITIVITY”  
:
An offset level for detection sensitivity.The higher the value,  
the lesser the interruption to the alarm detection.  
Valid when the sum of “DETECTING SENSITIVITY” and “TERMINATION SEN-  
SITIVITY” is 15 or less. If the value is set to more than 15, it will be automatically  
adjusted to the maximum value when exiting setting.  
“OBJECT SIZE LEVEL: Level for the size of the object to be detected. The higher  
the value the lower the sensitivity to detect the motion of  
small objects.  
Page 68 ‘Using the Motion Detect Feature’  
For setting the area from which motion is to be detected using the Motion Detect  
feature.  
“AREA SETTING”  
Page 68 ‘Using the Motion Detect Feature’  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
“PROGRAM TIMER” Menu  
Setting is disabled when in the Recording mode.  
Item  
Settings  
Description  
“WEEKLY TIMER”  
Opens the “WEEKLY TIMER” screen in the “PROGRAM TIMER” for setting.  
Page 50 ‘Record Programming Using the Program Timer (Weekly Timer)’  
“SUN”, “MON”, “TUE”,  
“WED”, “THU”, “FRI”,  
“SAT”, “DAY”  
“START”/ “END”  
DAY  
Starts/Ends recording at a specific time every week/day.  
For setting the day of the week for which recording starts/ends (or to start/end re-  
cording on a daily basis). Starting/Ending time can be set using the “START”/ “END”  
TIME (HOUR) and “START”/ “END” TIME (MINUTE) items described below.  
“SUN” ~ “SAT : For setting the day of the week for which recording starts/ends.  
“DAY”  
: Starts recording at a specific time everyday. In this case, days of  
the week for which recording is to be activated can also be speci-  
fied.  
00 ~ 23  
00 ~ 59  
“START”/ “END”  
TIME (HOUR)  
For setting the starting/ending time (in units of hours) of the timer.  
For setting the starting/ending time (in units of minutes) of the timer.  
For setting the no. of frames to be recorded.  
“START”/ “END”  
TIME (MINUTE)  
25  
“FRAME RATE”  
12.5  
8.3  
4.2  
2.5  
1.7  
1
1/2  
1/6  
1/12  
25  
: “25 IPS”  
: “12.5 IPS”  
: “8.3 IPS”  
: “4.2 IPS”  
: “2.5 IPS”  
: “1.7 IPS”  
: “1 IPS”  
: “1/2 IPS”  
: “1/6 IPS”  
: “1/12 IPS”  
12.5  
8.3  
4.2  
2.5  
1.7  
1
1/2  
1/6  
1/12  
Note  
• “AUDIO REC” switches automatically to “–” when “1/6 IPS” (1 image per 6  
seconds) or “1/12 IPS” (1 image per 12 seconds) is selected for “FRAME  
RATE”.  
“H”  
“N”  
“B”  
L”  
“REC QUALITY”  
“AUDIO REC”  
For setting the picture quality of the image to be recorded.  
“H” : HIGH (High picture quality)  
“N” : NORMAL (Normal picture quality)  
“B” : BASIC (Basic picture quality)  
L” : LONG (Long-play quality)  
“A”  
For setting whether to record audio signals.  
“A” : Audio signals recorded.  
: Audio signals not recorded.  
Note  
• Switches automatically to “–” when “1/6 IPS” (1 image per 6 seconds) or “1/12  
IPS” (1 image per 12 seconds) is selected for “FRAME RATE” in the menu.  
“OFF”  
“ON”  
“WLY”  
“EXEC”  
For turning on/off the timer.  
“OFF”  
“ON”  
: Timer not activated.  
: Turns “OFF” after recording has been executed once on a specific  
day/time. (Remains in the “ON” mode if “DAY” has been selected as  
the starting day.)  
“WLY”  
: Timer activates during the time range set on a weekly basis. Dis-  
abled when “START”/ “END” DAY is set as “DAY”.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menus (continued)  
“PROGRAM TIMER” Menu (continued)  
[ ] are factory settings.  
Item  
Settings  
Description  
“DATE TIMER”  
For executing the recording of a program on a specific date.  
Opens the “DATE TIMER” screen in the “PROGRAM TIMER” Menu for setting.  
Page 52 ‘Record Programming Using the Program Timer (Date Timer)’  
“START”/ “END”  
TIME (HOUR)  
00 ~ 23  
00 ~ 59  
For setting the starting/ending time (in units of hours) of the timer.  
For setting the starting/ending time (in units of minutes) of the timer.  
For setting the no. of frames to be recorded.  
“START”/ “END”  
TIME (MINUTE)  
“FRAME RATE”  
25  
12.5  
8.3  
4.2  
2.5  
1.7  
1
1/2  
1/6  
1/12  
25  
: “25 IPS”  
1.7  
1
1/2  
1/6  
1/12  
: “1.7 IPS”  
: “1 IPS”  
: “1/2 IPS”  
: “1/6 IPS”  
: “1/12 IPS”  
12.5 : “12.5 IPS”  
8.3 : “8.3 IPS”  
4.2 : “4.2 IPS”  
2.5 : “2.5 IPS”  
Note  
• “AUDIO REC” switches automatically to “–” when “1/6 IPS” (1 image per 6  
seconds) or “1/12 IPS” (1 image per 12 seconds) is selected for “FRAME  
RATE”.  
“REC QUALITY”  
“AUDIO REC”  
“H”  
“N”  
“B”  
L”  
For setting the picture quality of the image to be recorded.  
“H” : HIGH (High picture quality)  
“N” : NORMAL (Normal picture quality)  
“B” : BASIC (Basic picture quality)  
L” : LONG (Long-play quality)  
“A”  
For setting whether to record audio signals.  
“A” : Audio signals recorded.  
: Audio signals not recorded.  
Note  
• Switches automatically to “–” when “1/6 IPS” (1 image per 6 seconds) or “1/12  
IPS” (1 image per 12 seconds) is selected for “FRAME RATE” item in the  
menu.  
“EXEC”  
“ON”  
“OFF”  
For turning on/off the programmed timer.  
“ON”  
: Starts recording on the specified date every year.  
: Timer not activated.  
“OFF”  
START DATE “M”  
(MONTH)  
1 ~ 12  
For setting the date (in the Month unit) at which timer recording is executed.  
START DATE “D”  
(DAY)  
1 ~ 31  
For setting the date (in the Day unit) at which timer recording is executed.  
Note  
• When execution date is set as February 28 and ending date as the following  
day, the ending date of the program will be February 29 on leaps years and  
March 1 otherwise.  
“AFTER RELEASE”  
“CONTINUE”  
“NORMAL REC”  
“STOP”  
For setting the action when the timer is released upon pressing the [TIMER] button  
during timer recording or timer standby, or when all the timer recordings have ended  
and timers are released.  
“CONTINUE”  
: When the timer is released during timer recording, it con-  
tinues in the recording mode until the [STOP] button is  
pressed.  
When the timer is released during timer standby or when  
all the timer recordings have ended, it remains in the stop  
mode.  
: Stops recording using the Program Timer and switches to  
recording in the mode as set in the “REC MODE” Menu  
(Page 24).  
“NORMAL REC”  
“STOP”  
: Stops recording using the Program Timer instantly.  
Action when timer is released according to the respective settings of “AFTER RELEASE”  
Status when timer is released  
Timer Recording  
Continues in the timer recording mode  
Starts normal recording  
STOP  
Timer Standby  
All programs ended  
STOP  
Starts normal recording  
STOP  
STOP  
Starts normal recording  
STOP  
CONTINUE  
NORMAL REC  
STOP  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
“NETWORK” Menu  
[ ] are factory settings. (Setting is disabled when in the Recording mode.)  
Settings  
Item  
Description  
For setting the display name of VR-716 when it is connected to the network.  
Page 96 ‘Changing Network Settings of VR-716 from PC’  
vr716  
“HOST NAME”  
For selecting the method of setting the IP address.  
“STATIC”  
“DHCP”  
“OFF”  
“METHOD”  
“STATIC”  
: Select this when connecting to the network without using the DHCP  
server.When “STATICis selected, the “IP ADDRESS”, “NET MASK”  
and “DEFAULT GATEWAY” items will need to be specified as well.  
: Select this when connecting to the network using the DHCP server.  
“IP ADDRESS”, “NET MASK” and “DEFAULT GATEWAY” will be  
automatically assigned by the DHCP server.  
“DHCP”  
When “DHCP” is selected, the IP address will be masked. It will  
appear when displaying the “NETWORK” menu again after exiting  
it.  
“OFF”  
: Not connected to the network.  
Page 96 ‘Changing Network Settings of VR-716 from PC’  
For setting the “IP ADDRESS”, “NET MASK”, “DEFAULT GATEWAY” and “NAME  
SERVER”.  
Setting of these items will be required when “STATIC” is selected in the “METHOD”  
item of the “NETWORK” Menu. Ensure that there are no duplicate IP addresses in  
the network.  
192.168.0.10  
255.255.255.0  
192.168.0.254  
“IP ADDRESS”  
“NET MASK”  
“DEFAULT GATEWAY”  
Page 96 ‘Changing Network Settings of VR-716 from PC’  
Note  
• Setting will be disabled when “DHCP” address is selected in the “METHOD”  
item of the “NETWORK” Menu. (In this case, only the name server can be  
altered.)  
***.***.***.***  
“NAME SERVER”  
“MAC ADDRESS”  
Unique physical address of the product. This address cannot be altered.  
A “IP ADDRESS SETTING IN PROGRESS...message will be displayed on the monitor screen upon changing the network  
settings. All operations are disabled when this is shown.  
“DISK UTILITY/MAINTENANCE” Menu  
[ ] are factory settings. (Setting is disabled when in the Recording mode.)  
Item  
Settings  
Description  
“DISK UTILITY”  
“ON”  
“OFF”  
“AUTO SCAN DISK”  
For setting whether to scan disk upon turning “ON” the power of VR-716.  
“ON”  
: Starts to scan disk when the power is ON.  
: Does not scan disk.  
“OFF”  
Page 55 ‘Scanning Hard Disk Data (“AUTO SCAN DISK”)’  
“ON”  
“OFF”  
“MANUAL SCAN  
DISK”  
Scan Disk starts upon setting to “ON” and performing procedures according to the  
onscreen message.  
Page 56 ‘Scanning Hard Disk Data (“MANUAL SCAN DISK”)’  
“DATE” “TIME” “SET”  
“DEFRAG AUTO  
MODE”  
For performing defrag.  
Do so by following procedures according to the onscreen message.  
Page 57 ‘Defrag’  
01  
00  
“ON”  
“OFF”  
“YES”  
“NO”  
“DEFRAG DATABASE”  
“FORMAT”  
“YES”  
“NO”  
For formatting the hard disk.  
Do so by following procedures according to the onscreen message.  
Page 58 ‘Initializing the Hard Disk (“FORMAT”)’  
“YES”  
“NO”  
“MIRRORING”  
Specifies the mirroring settings.  
Do so by following procedures according to the onscreen message.  
Page 59 ‘Hard Disk Mirroring’  
“MAINTENANCE”  
“TOTAL TIME”  
Displays the total operating time.  
“POWER OUTAGE  
TIME LIST”  
Displays the time at which power failure is detected. Use the [CANCEL] button to  
clear the list.  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Routine Uses  
Viewing Live Camera Images  
When connecting the monitor to the [EE OUT] terminal  
Only live images currently displayed can be viewed on the monitor that is connected to the [EE OUT] terminal.Playback of recorded  
images and display of menu screens are not possible.  
The following screen will be displayed on the moni-  
tor when it is connected to the [EE OUT] terminal:  
13  
14  
15  
16  
CAMERA 1 CAMERA 2 CAMERA 5 CAMERA 6  
1~4/~16  
9~12  
5~8  
AC IN  
CAMERA 1  
CAMERA 2  
(220V–240V  
)
CAMERA 3 CAMERA 4 CAMERA 7 CAMERA 8  
CAMERA 9 CAMERA 10 CAMERA 13 CAMERA 14  
CAMERA 11 CAMERA 12 CAMERA 15 CAMERA 16  
SIGNAL GND  
11 13 15 RST COM  
IN  
IN  
EXT REC  
CLK SER  
WAR RST REC  
OUT OUT OUT  
12 14 16 OUT  
AL
13~16  
COM  
EE OUT  
1~4/~16  
CAMERA 3  
CAMERA 4  
[EE OUT] Terminal  
CAMERA 5  
CAMERA 7  
CAMERA 6  
CAMERA 8  
1.4.  
5~8  
HDD  
FWD  
OPERATE  
SEARCH  
MENU  
REV  
CAMERA 9  
CAMERA 10  
CAMERA 12  
LOCK  
OUT  
EXECUTE  
9~12  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
CAMERA 11  
SKIP  
CAMERA 13  
CAMERA 15  
CAMERA 14  
CAMERA 16  
2.  
3.  
13~16  
Displaying in the 16 Split Screen Mode  
Notes  
• When the monitor is connected to the [EE  
OUT] terminal and only one camera is set to  
“ON” among the “CAMERA 1” ~ “CAMERA 4”  
items for each “BLOCK” (1-4) in the “REC  
MODE” Menu (page 24), only a single  
screen will be displayed on the monitor even  
when “1-4” has been selected in the “MONI-  
TOR DISPLAY” Menu (page 26). Screens  
will be displayed in the quad picture when  
“1-16” is selected.  
1.  
Press the [MENU] button  
• Follow procedures in ‘Changing Menu  
Settings’ on page 22 to display the  
“MONITOR DISPLAY” Menu.  
MONITOR DISPLAY  
1.EE OUT 1-4/-16  
2.SINGLE PICTURE MODE  
3.QUAD PICTURE MODE  
BLOCK 1  
1-4  
1SEC  
1SEC  
1SEC  
1SEC  
OFF  
BLOCK 2  
BLOCK 3  
BLOCK 4  
4.ALARM/SENSOR SWITCH  
5.SPLIT SCREEN BORDER COLOR BORDER 3  
MENU  
• When all the items in “CAMERA 1” ~ “CAM-  
ERA 4” (when Block 1 is selected) is set to  
“OFF” in the “REC MODE” Menu (page 24),  
the display turns black and recording is not  
executed.  
2.  
3.  
Press [  
16”  
] to move the cursor to “EE OUT 1-4/-  
Turn the jog dial to select  
“1-16”  
MONITOR DISPLAY  
1.EE OUT 1-4/-16  
2.SINGLE PICTURE MODE  
3.QUAD PICTURE MODE  
BLOCK 1  
1-16  
1SEC  
1SEC  
1SEC  
1SEC  
OFF  
BLOCK 2  
REV  
FWD  
BLOCK 3  
BLOCK 4  
4.ALARM/SENSOR SWITCH  
5.SPLIT SCREEN BORDER COLOR BORDER 3  
4.  
Press [MENU] to end setting  
MENU  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When connecting the monitor to the [VIDEO OUT] terminal  
Display of live images, playback of recorded images and display of menu screens on the monitor are possible when it is connected  
to the [VIDEO OUT] terminal.  
The following screen will be displayed on the  
AUDIO IN  
monitor upon pressing theCamera Selectionbut-  
tons:  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
VIDEO IN  
THRU OUT  
SCSI  
AUDIO OUT  
VIDEO OUT  
Lights up  
LAN  
1
2
1
2
AQ  
E  
RS-232C  
UPS  
3
: Screen switches in the following order each time the  
button is pressed.  
[VIDEO OUT] Terminal  
CAMERA 1  
CAMERA 2  
CAMERA 3  
CAMERA 3  
CAMERA 4  
Quad Picture  
1
3
2
4
ALARM  
5
7
6
8
Single Picture  
SENSOR  
ALARM  
SENSOR  
9
10  
1
ALARM  
13  
15  
14  
The following screen will be displayed on the  
monitor upon pressing the [SEQUENCE MULTI]  
button:  
SENSOR  
SEQUENCE  
MULTI  
REC  
STOP  
11  
ALARM  
16  
SENSOR  
‘Camera Selection’  
[SEQUENCE MULTI]  
SEQUENCE  
MULTI  
: Screen switches in the following order each time the  
button is pressed.  
Notes  
Single Picture Mode (LED lights up in green)  
• Camera Selection buttons can be used to se-  
lect cameras only when multiple cameras are  
set to “ON” among the “CAMERA 1” ~ “CAM-  
ERA 4” items for each “BLOCK” (1-4) in the  
“REC MODE” Menu (page 24).When cam-  
eras that are set to “OFF” are selected, the  
monitor will output a black image. If only 1  
camera is set to “ON” in each block, the moni-  
tor will only display image of cameras in the  
“ON” mode.  
CAMERA 1  
CAMERA 2  
CAMERA 3  
16 Split Screen Display (LED lights up in orange)  
CAMERA 1 CAMERA 2 CAMERA 5 CAMERA 6  
CAMERA 3 CAMERA 4 CAMERA 7 CAMERA 8  
CAMERA 9 CAMERA 10 CAMERA 13 CAMERA 14  
• When switching the screen using the [SE-  
QUENCE MULTI] button, the display image  
prior to switching will freeze for an instant.  
Quad Picture Mode (LED lights up in green)  
CAMERA 11 CAMERA 12 CAMERA 15 CAMERA 16  
CAMERA 1 CAMERA 2  
CAMERA 3 CAMERA 4  
CAMERA 5 CAMERA 6  
CAMERA 7 CAMERA 8  
CAMERA 9 CAMERA 10  
CAMERA 11 CAMERA 12  
Refer to page 34 on setting the time interval for switching dis-  
plays when in the Single Picture mode.  
Refer to page 35 on setting the time interval for switching dis-  
plays when in the Quad Picture mode.  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Routine Uses (continued)  
Viewing Live Camera Images  
Setting Time Interval for Switching Displays in the Single Picture Mode  
This enables the monitor to display images from Camera 1 ~ Camera 16 by switching from one camera to another according to the  
preset time interval.  
Connect the monitor to the [VIDEO OUT] ter-  
minal.  
1.  
Press the [MENU] button  
SINGLE PICTURE MODE  
9.CAMERA 9  
1SEC  
10.CAMERA 10 1SEC  
11.CAMERA 11 1SEC  
12.CAMERA 12 1SEC  
13.CAMERA 13 1SEC  
14.CAMERA 14 1SEC  
15.CAMERA 15 1SEC  
16.CAMERA 16 1SEC  
1.CAMERA 1 1SEC  
2.CAMERA 2 1SEC  
3.CAMERA 3 1SEC  
4.CAMERA 4 1SEC  
5.CAMERA 5 1SEC  
6.CAMERA 6 1SEC  
7.CAMERA 7 1SEC  
8.CAMERA 8 1SEC  
• Follow procedures inChanging Menu  
Settings’ on page 22 to display the  
“MONITOR DISPLAY” Menu and the  
“SINGLE PICTURE MODE” screens.  
1.5.  
<= :RETURN  
HDD  
FWD  
OPERATE  
SEARCH  
MENU  
REV  
LOCK  
OUT  
2.  
Press [  
] to select a camera no.  
EXECUTE  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
• Move the cursor to the camera no. for which monitor display time is to  
be altered.  
SKIP  
SINGLE PICTURE MODE  
9.CAMERA 9  
1SEC  
1.CAMERA 1 1SEC  
2.CAMERA 2 1SEC  
3.CAMERA 3 1SEC  
4.CAMERA 4 1SEC  
5.CAMERA 5 1SEC  
6.CAMERA 6 1SEC  
7.CAMERA 7 1SEC  
8.CAMERA 8 1SEC  
10.CAMERA 10 1SEC  
11.CAMERA 11 1SEC  
12.CAMERA 12 1SEC  
13.CAMERA 13 1SEC  
14.CAMERA 14 1SEC  
15.CAMERA 15 1SEC  
16.CAMERA 16 1SEC  
2.4.  
3.  
3.  
Turn the jog dial to select  
the monitor display time  
<= :RETURN  
1
3
2
4
ALARM  
5
7
6
SENSOR  
ALARM  
8
REV  
FWD  
SENSOR  
• Clockwise direction: Increases the time  
9
10  
1
ALARM  
13  
15  
14  
16  
value.  
SENSOR  
SEQUENCE  
REC  
STOP  
MULTI  
• Anti-clockwise direction:Decreases the time  
value.  
11  
ALARM  
SENSOR  
6.  
4.  
Move the cursor to “<=: RETURN” using [  
and press [  
]
]
• This returns the screen display to the  
“MONITOR DISPLAY” Menu.  
SINGLE PICTURE MODE  
9.CAMERA 9  
1SEC  
10.CAMERA 10 1SEC  
11.CAMERA 11 1SEC  
12.CAMERA 12 1SEC  
13.CAMERA 13 1SEC  
14.CAMERA 14 1SEC  
15.CAMERA 15 1SEC  
16.CAMERA 16 1SEC  
1.CAMERA 1 1SEC  
2.CAMERA 2 1SEC  
3.CAMERA 3 1SEC  
4.CAMERA 4 1SEC  
5.CAMERA 5 1SEC  
6.CAMERA 6 1SEC  
7.CAMERA 7 1SEC  
8.CAMERA 8 1SEC  
Note  
• Display in the Single Picture mode is possible  
only when the “CAMERA 1” ~ “CAMERA 4”  
items are set toONfor each block in theREC  
MODE” Menu (page 24) and the “SINGLE  
PICTURE MODEitem in the “MONITOR DIS-  
PLAY” Menu (page 26) is not set to “OFF”.  
<= :RETURN  
5.  
Press [MENU] to end setting  
• The display returns to the normal screen.  
MENU  
6.  
Press [SEQUENCE MULTI] to select the Single  
Picture mode  
• Monitor starts to switch its display automatically.  
• LED lights up in green.  
“SINGLE PICTURE MODE”  
SEQUENCE  
MULTI  
CAMERA 1  
CAMERA 2  
CAMERA 3  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Time Interval for Switching Displays in the Quad Picture Mode  
Monitor will display images of each block (“BLOCK 1”: “CAMERA 1” ~ “CAMERA 4”, “BLOCK 2”: “CAMERA 5” ~ “CAMERA 8”,  
“BLOCK 3”:CAMERA 9” ~ “CAMERA 12”, “BLOCK 4”:CAMERA 13” ~ “CAMERA 16”) in quad picture by switching from one block  
to another.  
1.  
Press the [MENU] button  
• Follow procedures inChanging Menu  
Settings’ on page 22 to display the  
“MONITOR DISPLAY” Menu.  
Connect the monitor to the [VIDEO OUT] ter-  
minal.  
MONITOR DISPLAY  
1.EE OUT 1-4/-16  
2.SINGLE PICTURE MODE  
3.QUAD PICTURE MODE  
BLOCK 1  
1-4  
1SEC  
1SEC  
1SEC  
1SEC  
OFF  
BLOCK 2  
BLOCK 3  
BLOCK 4  
4.ALARM/SENSOR SWITCH  
5.SPLIT SCREEN BORDER COLOR BORDER 3  
MENU  
1.4.  
HDD  
OPERATE  
SEARCH  
MENU  
REV  
FWD  
LOCK  
OUT  
2.  
Press [  
PICTURE MODE” item  
] to select a block under the “QUAD  
EXECUTE  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
SKIP  
• Move the cursor to the camera block no. for which monitor display time  
is to be altered.  
2.  
3.  
MONITOR DISPLAY  
1.EE OUT 1-4/-16  
2.SINGLE PICTURE MODE  
3.QUAD PICTURE MODE  
BLOCK 1  
1-4  
1SEC  
1SEC  
3SEC  
1SEC  
OFF  
BLOCK 2  
BLOCK 3  
BLOCK 4  
1
3
2
4
ALARM  
5
7
6
3.  
4.  
Turn the jog dial to select  
the monitor display time  
4.ALARM/SENSOR SWITCH  
5.SPLIT SCREEN BORDER COLOR BORDER 3  
SENSOR  
ALARM  
8
SENSOR  
9
10  
1
ALARM  
13  
15  
14  
16  
SENSOR  
SEQUENCE  
MULTI  
REC  
STOP  
P
11  
ALARM  
REV  
FWD  
SENSOR  
5.  
Press [MENU] to end setting  
• The display returns to the normal screen.  
Notes  
• Display in the Quad Picture mode is possible  
only when multiple cameras are set to “ON” in  
the corresponding block of the “REC MODE”  
Menu (page 24) and the “QUAD PICTURE  
MODE” item in the “MONITOR DISPLAY”  
Menu (page 26) is not set to “OFF”. Moni-  
tor will display in the single picture if only one  
camera is set to “ON” in the block.  
MENU  
5.  
Press [SEQUENCE MULTI] to select the Quad  
Picture mode  
• Camera images for each block are displayed  
in the layout as follows:  
• Monitor starts to switch its display automatically in quad picture.  
• LED lights up in green.  
“BLOCK 1”:  
CAMERA 1 CAMERA 2  
“QUAD PICTURE MODE”  
CAMERA 3 CAMERA 4  
SEQUENCE  
MULTI  
“BLOCK 2”:  
CAMERA 1 CAMERA 2  
CAMERA 3 CAMERA 4  
CAMERA 5 CAMERA 6  
CAMERA 7 CAMERA 8  
CAMERA 9 CAMERA 10  
CAMERA 11 CAMERA 12  
CAMERA 5 CAMERA 6  
CAMERA 7 CAMERA 8  
“BLOCK 3”:  
CAMERA 9 CAMERA 10  
CAMERA 11 CAMERA 12  
“BLOCK 4”:  
CAMERA 13 CAMERA 14  
CAMERA 15 CAMERA 16  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Routine Uses (continued)  
Recording Camera Images  
Recording in the Normal Mode  
1.2.  
1.  
Press the [MENU] button  
• Display the “REC MODE” Menu by following the procedures in ‘Chang-  
ing Menu Settings’ on page 22 and specify settings for menu items  
required for recording.  
HDD  
OPERATE  
L
SEARCH  
MENU  
REV  
FWD  
R
LOCK  
OUT  
MENU  
A
EXECUTE  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
SKIP  
Main menu items related to recording:  
Select the camera channel block for which  
recording mode is to be set.  
• “BLOCK 1”: “CAMERA 1” ~ “CAMERA 4”  
• “BLOCK 2”: “CAMERA 5” ~ “CAMERA 8”  
• “BLOCK 3”: “CAMERA 9” ~ “CAMERA 12”  
• “BLOCK 4”: “CAMERA 13” ~ “CAMERA 16”  
REC MODE  
1.BLOCK  
1
2.CAMERA 1  
ON  
3.CAMERA 2  
OFF  
Specify for each camera whether to execute  
recording.  
CANCEL  
SEARCH  
4.CAMERA 3  
OFF  
6
5.CAMERA 4  
OFF  
6.FRAME RATE  
7.REC QUALITY  
8.AUDIO REC  
RECORDABLE HOUR  
25 IPS  
H
ON  
8
TIMER  
Select the frame rate during recording.  
APPROX. 25H  
14  
16  
DISPLAY  
Select the picture quality of the recording  
image.  
SEQUENCE  
MULTI  
REC  
STOP  
PLAY  
STILL  
Select whether to execute audio recording.  
[STOP]  
3.  
Displays an estimate of remaining recording  
time.  
Specify settings for each block.  
2.  
Press [MENU] to end setting  
• This exits the menu to return to the normal screen.  
MENU  
Notes  
• Recording will not be executed if all cameras  
within a block are set to “OFF” in Step 1.  
• Audio recording will be disabled if “1/6 IPS” or  
“1/12 IPS” is selected for “FRAME RATE”.  
3.  
Press the [REC] button  
• The recording mark [_] on the front display lights up and recording  
starts.  
Front Display  
REC  
To stop recording  
Press the [STOP] button  
STOP  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Repeat Recording (Repeat Record Feature)  
VR-716 comes equipped with a Repeat Record feature that returns to the start point and overwrites old data when there is  
insufficient hard disk space.  
Page 112 ‘Repeat Record’  
1.  
Press the [MENU] button  
• Follow procedures in ‘Changing Menu Settings’ on page 22 to display  
the “OPERATION/EXT REC” Menu.  
1.4.  
MENU  
HDD  
FWD  
OPERATE  
L
SEARCH  
MENU  
OPERATION/EXT REC  
[ OPERATION ]  
1.RECOVERY REC  
2.REPEAT REC  
REV  
PRIOR STATE  
OFF  
R
LOCK  
OUT  
3.LANGUAGE SELECTION  
4.WATER MARK  
5.OPERATION LOCK  
[EXT REC]  
1.EXT REC MODE  
2.SERIES REC  
ENGLISH  
OFF  
A
EXECUTE  
ALL  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
OFF  
OFF  
SKIP  
2.  
Press [  
“REPEAT REC” item  
] to select the  
• Move the cursor to select.  
2.  
3.  
3.  
Turn the jog dial to select the mode of repeat  
recording  
CANCEL  
SEARCH  
6
8
TIMER  
OPERATION/EXT REC  
Page 112 ‘Repeat Record’  
[ OPERATION ]  
1.RECOVERY REC  
2.REPEAT REC  
3.LANGUAGE SELECTION  
4.WATER MARK  
5.OPERATION LOCK  
[EXT REC]  
PRIOR STATE  
14  
16  
DISPLAY  
OFF  
ENGLISH  
OFF  
SEQUENCE  
MULTI  
REC  
STOP  
PLAY  
STILL  
REV  
FWD  
ALL  
1.EXT REC MODE  
2.SERIES REC  
OFF  
OFF  
5.  
4.  
Press [MENU] to end setting  
• This exits the menu to return to the normal screen.  
MENU  
5.  
Press the [REC] button  
• The recording mark [_] as well as the [REPEAT] indicator on the front  
display light up and recording starts.  
Front Display  
REC  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Routine Uses (continued)  
Viewing Recorded Images  
Playing Back Recorded Images  
Play back the recorded images.To do so, search according to the date of the image to be played back using “DATE/TIME SEARCH”  
(page 40) or according to the time when alarm/sensor signals are received using the “ALARM/SENSOR SEARCH” feature (☞  
page 41).  
1.  
Search for the image to view  
• Search according to the date of the image. (page 40)  
• Search according to alarm data. (page 41)  
Connect the monitor for viewing the playback  
image to the [VIDEO OUT] terminal.  
2.  
Press the [PLAY] button  
• The playback mark [<] on the front display lights up and playback starts.  
CANCEL  
SEARCH  
6
Front Display  
PLAY  
8
TIMER  
14  
16  
DISPLAY  
SEQUENCE  
MULTI  
REC  
STOP  
PLAY  
STILL  
2.  
3.  
Press the ‘Camera Selec-  
tion’ button  
• Select the camera no. for which its  
image is to be displayed on the moni-  
tor.  
1
3
2
4
ALARM  
5
7
6
SENSOR  
ALARM  
8
SENSOR  
3
9
10  
1
ALARM  
13  
15  
14  
16  
SENSOR  
CAMERA 3  
SEQUENCE  
MULTI  
REC  
STOP  
11  
ALARM  
SENSOR  
To stop playback  
To stop playback temporarily  
3.  
‘Camera Selection’  
STILL  
STOP  
• Stops playback.  
• Stops playback temporarily.  
To restart playback, press the  
[PLAY] button.  
Upon stopping, the display  
switches to the live camera im-  
age. Image may be distorted for  
an instant upon switching.  
Notes  
• Playback is possible regardless of the order  
in Steps 1 and 2.  
• When in the Simultaneous Playback mode that  
enables playback and recording at the same  
time, press the [STOP] button once to stop  
playback, and press the [STOP] button again  
to stop recording.  
• If no matching image is found in the selected  
camera no. during the specified date/time in  
Step 2, the “SPECIFIED IMAGE IS NOT RE-  
CORDED” and “JUMP WITH SKIP BUTTON”  
messages will be displayed on the screen.  
• When in the Simultaneous Playback mode and  
playback is executed immediately after record-  
ing starts, the “NO PLAYBACK POSSIBLE  
IMAGES” message will appear on the screen.  
In this case, press the [PLAY] button again  
after recording has continued for about 1  
minute.  
Playing Back During Recording (Simultaneous  
Playback Mode)  
Viewing of recorded images is possible when in the Recording mode.  
This will not affect the images recorded.  
• The playback mark [<] and the recording mark [_] on the front display  
will blink alternately.  
Front Display  
The following modes of playback are possible  
when in the Simultaneous Playback mode:  
• Normal playback  
• Direct Jump Playback  
Page 40 ‘Searching Image Accord-  
ing to Date/Time’  
Caution  
• Jog/Shuttle Playback  
• Skip Playback  
Page 42 ‘Adjusting Playback Speed’  
Page 43 ‘Viewing Recorded Images  
in the Skip Mode’  
• Refer to the notes related to SummerTime.  
(Page 116)  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Viewing Recorded Images in the Split Screen Mode  
1.  
Press the [PLAY] button  
• The playback mark [<] on the front display lights up and playback starts.  
Connect the monitor for viewing the playback  
image to the [VIDEO OUT] terminal.  
Front Display  
PLAY  
C
1
3
2
4
ALARM  
5
7
6
SENSOR  
ALARM  
8
SENSOR  
9
10  
1
ALARM  
13  
15  
14  
16  
2.  
Press the ‘Camera Selection’ button  
• Select the camera no. for which its im-  
age is to be displayed on the monitor.  
SENSOR  
D
SEQUENCE  
MULTI  
REC  
STOP  
PLAY  
STILL  
11  
ALARM  
SENSOR  
2.3.  
1.  
3
‘Camera Selection’  
CAMERA 3  
Notes  
• If there is no image in the selected camera  
no., the “SPECIFIED IMAGE IS NOT RE-  
CORDED” message will be displayed. In this  
case, jump using the [SKIP] button.  
• Display in the Split Screen mode is possible  
only when multiple cameras are set to “ON”  
for the selected camera block in the “REC  
MODE” Menu (Page 24).  
• When selecting cameras from different blocks,  
images may distort or error may occur in the  
time display if the “REC MODEMenu settings  
(Page 24) vary across the blocks.  
3.  
Press the ‘Camera Selection’ button again  
• Monitor will display in quad picture.  
3
CAMERA 1  
CAMERA 3  
CAMERA 2  
CAMERA 4  
• Recorded images cannot be viewed in 16 Split  
pictures.  
To view image of other cameras in the  
Split Screen  
To exit quad picture  
3
5
5
• Press theCamera Selection’  
button.  
Image of the selected cam-  
era no.will be played back on  
the monitor.  
• Select the camera no. to be  
displayed on the monitor by press-  
ing the ‘Camera Selection’ button  
twice.  
CAMERA 5  
CAMERA 7  
CAMERA 6  
CAMERA 8  
CAMERA 5  
CAMERA 3  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Routine Uses (continued)  
Viewing Recorded Images  
Searching Image According to Date/Time (“DATE/TIME SEARCH”)  
1.  
Press the [SEARCH] button  
• This displays the “SEARCH MENUscreen.  
Connect the monitor for viewing the playback  
image to the [VIDEO OUT] terminal.  
SEARCH MENU  
1.SEARCH SETTING  
2.DATE/TIME SEARCH  
3.ALARM/SENSOR SEARCH  
4.SKIP MODE  
LATEST  
SEARCH  
ALARM  
1HOUR  
5.TIME JUMP SETTING  
1.  
HDD  
OPERATE  
SEARCH  
MENU  
REV  
FWD  
2.  
Move the cursor to  
“DATE/TIME SEARCH”  
DATE/TIME SEARCH  
LOCK  
OUT  
D
15  
M
Y
2003  
H
12  
M
28  
07  
EXECUTE  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
using [  
] and press  
SKIP  
[
]
• This displays the “DATE/TIME  
SEARCH” screen.  
<= :RETURN  
[EXEC]:SEARCH  
2.4. 5. 3.4.  
3.  
Turn the jog dial to select a “D” (Day) value  
CANCEL  
SEARCH  
6
DATE/TIME SEARCH  
8
TIMER  
M
07  
D
15  
Y
2003  
H
12  
M
28  
REV  
FWD  
14  
16  
DISPLAY  
SEQUENCE  
MULTI  
REC  
STOP  
PLAY  
STILL  
<= :RETURN  
[EXEC]:SEARCH  
6.  
• Clockwise direction: Increases the value.  
• Anti-clockwise direction: Decreases the value.  
4.  
Press [  
(Month) value  
] and turn the jog dial to select a “M”  
DATE/TIME SEARCH  
• Next, use [ ] and the jog dial to se-  
lect the “Y” (Year), “H” (Hour) and “M”  
(Minute) values accordingly.  
D
15  
M
07  
Y
2003  
H
12  
M
28  
Notes  
REV  
FWD  
<= :RETURN  
• Date/Time Search can be performed when in  
the Recording mode.  
[EXEC]:SEARCH  
• If no image is found on the specified date/time,  
the recorded image of the next closest date  
will be displayed in the Still mode.  
• When “LATEST” is selected during specifica-  
tion of Date/Time Search, the current time will  
be displayed as the date/time in the “DATE/  
TIME SEARCH” screen. When “PREVIOUS”  
is selected, the date/time of the previous  
search will be displayed. Memory will be  
cleared upon turning off the power and time  
display switches to the current time.  
5.  
Press the [EXECUTE] button  
• This starts the Date/Time Search.  
Upon completion of search, image of the selected date/time will be  
displayed in the Still mode.  
EXECUTE  
(This is also applicable during “ALARM/SEN-  
SOR SEARCH” as described in page 41.)  
• The order of D/M/Y will change in accordance  
with the “DATE DISPLAY” setting in the  
“ONSCREEN MODE” menu.  
6.  
Press the [PLAY] button  
• This starts the playback of the image that is retrieved according to the  
date/time.  
Caution  
PLAY  
• Refer to the notes related to SummerTime.  
(Page 116)  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Searching Image According to Alarm/Sensor Data (“ALARM/SENSOR SEARCH”)  
Connect the monitor for viewing the playback  
image to the [VIDEO OUT] terminal.  
1.  
Press the [SEARCH] button  
• This displays the “SEARCH MENU”  
SEARCH MENU  
1.SEARCH SETTING  
2.DATE/TIME SEARCH  
3.ALARM/SENSOR SEARCH  
4.SKIP MODE  
LATEST  
screen.  
ALARM  
1HOUR  
1.  
5.TIME JUMP SETTING  
SEARCH  
HDD  
OPERATE  
SEARCH  
MENU  
REV  
FWD  
LOCK  
OUT  
2.  
Move the cursor to the  
“ALARM/SENSOR  
EXECUTE  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
SKIP  
ALARM/SENSOR SEARCH  
D
M
Y
H
12  
M
SEARCH” item using  
15  
07  
2003  
28  
No.  
CAMERA  
D
M
Y
H
M
S
:
:
-
-
******  
******  
******  
******  
** ** ** ** ** ** ****  
** ** **  
:
:
-
-
** ** ** ** ** ** ****  
** ** **  
[
] and press [  
]
:
:
-
-
** ** ** ** ** ** ****  
** ** **  
:
:
-
-
** ** ** ** ** ** ****  
** ** **  
2.3. 4.5. 3.5.  
:
:
-
-
******  
** ** ** ** ** ** ****  
** ** **  
:
:
• This displays the “ALARM/SENSOR  
SEARCH” screen.  
-
-
******  
** ** ** ** ** ** ****  
** ** **  
:
:
-
-
******  
******  
******  
** ** ** ** ** ** ****  
** ** **  
:
:
-
-
-
-
** ** ** ** ** ** ****  
** ** **  
:
:
** ** ** ** ** ** ****  
** ** **  
<= :RETURN  
CANCEL  
SEARCH  
6
[CANCEL]:LIST CLEAR [EXEC]:SEARCH  
8
TIMER  
14  
16  
DISPLAY  
SEQUENCE  
MULTI  
REC  
STOP  
PLAY  
STILL  
3.  
Turn the jog dial to select a “D” (Day) value  
• Next, use [ ] and the jog dial to se-  
lect the “M” (Month), “Y” (Year), “H”  
(Hour) and “M” (Minute) values ac-  
cordingly.  
6.  
ALARM/SENSOR SEARCH  
D
15  
M
Y
H
M
28  
S
07  
2003  
12  
<How to clear the Alarm Record List>  
No.  
CAMERA  
D
M
Y
H
M
:
:
-
-
******  
******  
******  
******  
** ** ** ** ** ** ****  
** ** **  
:
:
-
-
** ** ** ** ** ** ****  
** ** **  
:
:
• Press the [CANCEL] button when in the  
“ALARM/SENSOR SEARCH” screen.  
z A screen to confirm deletion of the alarm  
records will be displayed. Press the [EX-  
ECUTE] button.  
-
-
** ** ** ** ** ** ****  
** ** **  
:
:
-
-
** ** ** ** ** ** ****  
** ** **  
REV  
FWD  
:
:
-
-
******  
** ** ** ** ** ** ****  
** ** **  
:
:
-
-
******  
** ** ** ** ** ** ****  
** ** **  
:
:
-
-
******  
******  
******  
** ** ** ** ** ** ****  
** ** **  
:
:
-
-
** ** ** ** ** ** ****  
** ** **  
:
:
-
-
** ** ** ** ** ** ****  
** ** **  
<= :RETURN  
[CANCEL]:LIST CLEAR [EXEC]:SEARCH  
z This deletes the entire Alarm Record List  
within the hard disk. (To cancel the delete  
operation, press the [CANCEL] button.)  
• Alarm data will be cleared upon deleting the  
Alarm Record List, and Alarm Search will be  
disabled. In this case, images recorded dur-  
ing alarm recording are not deleted but are  
converted into images in the normal record-  
ing mode.  
• Deletion of the Alarm Record List is not pos-  
sible when in the Recording mode. (The  
“[CANCEL]: LIST CLEAR” display will disap-  
pear.)  
4.  
Press the [EXECUTE] button  
• This starts the Alarm Search. Upon  
completion of search, the Alarm List  
on or about the specified date/time will  
be displayed in order starting from the  
ALARM/SENSOR SEARCH  
D
15  
M
Y
H
12  
M
07  
2003  
28  
No.  
CAMERA  
D
M
Y
H
M
S
:
:
-
-
******  
******  
******  
** ** ** ** ** ** ****  
** ** **  
:
:
-
-
** ** ** ** ** ** ****  
** ** **  
:
:
-
-
** ** ** ** ** ** ****  
** ** **  
000002  
000001  
5
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
16-07-2003  
15-07-2003  
10:10:10  
10:10:10  
:
:
-
-
******  
******  
******  
******  
** ** ** ** ** ** ****  
** ** **  
:
:
-
-
** ** ** ** ** ** ****  
** ** **  
most current record.  
EXECUTE  
:
:
-
-
** ** ** ** ** ** ****  
** ** **  
:
:
-
-
** ** ** ** ** ** ****  
** ** **  
<= :RETURN  
[CANCEL]:LIST CLEAR [EXEC]:SEARCH  
Notes  
5.  
Turn the jog dial and press [EXECUTE] to select  
the alarm to view  
• A maximum of 4 camera Nos.may be recorded  
in each Alarm List when multiple alarms are  
simultaneously triggered.Playback in this case  
will start from the image of the smallest cam-  
era No.. To view image of other cameras, se-  
lect accordingly using the Camera Selection  
buttons.  
• If there is no alarm record on the specified date/  
time, the next closest alarm record will be se-  
lected.  
• Image of the selected alarm will be  
displayed in the Still mode.  
ALARM/SENSOR SEARCH  
D
15  
M
Y
H
12  
M
28  
S
07  
2003  
No.  
CAMERA  
D
M
Y
H
M
:
:
-
-
******  
******  
******  
** ** ** ** ** ** ****  
** ** **  
:
:
-
-
** ** ** ** ** ** ****  
** ** **  
:
:
-
-
** ** ** ** ** ** ****  
** ** **  
000002  
000001  
5
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
16-07-2003  
15-07-2003  
10:10:10  
REV  
FWD  
10:10:10  
:
:
-
-
******  
******  
******  
******  
** ** ** ** ** ** ****  
** ** **  
EXECUTE  
:
:
-
-
** ** ** ** ** ** ****  
** ** **  
:
:
-
-
-
-
** ** ** ** ** ** ****  
** ** **  
:
:
** ** ** ** ** ** ****  
** ** **  
<= :RETURN  
[CANCEL]:LIST CLEAR [EXEC]:SEARCH  
• When the Alarm List is displayed, the [SKIP]  
button can be used to jump scroll the list in  
units of 100 records.  
• When the Alarm No. in the alarm search list  
exceeds 7 digits, only the lower 6 digits will be  
displayed.  
• As searching will take time when there is an  
increase in the number of alarms, frequent us-  
age to receive alarms is not recommended.  
6.  
Press the [PLAY] button  
• This starts the playback of the selected alarm image.  
PLAY  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Routine Uses (continued)  
Viewing Recorded Images  
Adjusting Playback Speed (Jog/Shuttle Playback)  
Playback speed can be adjusted by turning the jog/shuttle dial. This feature is very useful when searching for a specific screen for  
viewing.  
Turn the shuttle dial  
When in the Playback mode  
Shuttle dial  
Jog dial  
Still  
HDD  
OPERATE  
SEARCH  
MENU  
REV  
Slow Reverse  
Slow Forward  
FWD  
x–1  
REV  
x1  
LOCK  
OUT  
FWD  
EXECUTE  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
x–3  
x–5  
x3  
SKIP  
x5  
x–15  
x15  
x60  
x–60  
x–360  
x360  
This starts the Slow Motion Playback as well as the Fast Forward and Fast  
Reverse Playback modes.  
Turn the jog dial  
When in the Playback mode  
Note  
• Frame rate when turning the jog dial at a  
faster speed may be lower as compared  
with when turning it at a slower speed.  
HDD  
FWD  
HDD  
FWD  
REV  
REV  
Starts frame-by-frame play-  
back in the forward direction.  
Starts frame-by-frame play-  
back in the reverse direction.  
• When the jog dial is turned, frame-to-frame playback is performed.Play-  
back switches to the Still mode upon releasing the dial.  
CANCEL  
SEARCH  
6
8
TIMER  
14  
16  
DISPLAY  
Press the [STOP] or [PLAY] button to stop Jog Play-  
SEQUENCE  
MULTI  
REC  
STOP  
PLAY  
STILL  
back/Shuttle Playback  
PLAY  
STOP  
[PLAY]  
[STOP]  
• Monitor display switches to the  
live camera image.  
• Monitor display switches to the  
normal playback screen.  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Viewing Recorded Images in the Skip Mode  
Connect the monitor for viewing the playback  
image to the [VIDEO OUT] terminal.  
1.  
Press the [SEARCH] button  
• This displays the “SEARCH MENU”  
screen.  
SEARCH MENU  
SEARCH  
1.SEARCH SETTING  
2.DATE/TIME SEARCH  
3.ALARM/SENSOR SEARCH  
4.SKIP MODE  
LATEST  
1.  
4.  
ALARM  
1HOUR  
5.TIME JUMP SETTING  
HDD  
FWD  
OPERATE  
SEARCH  
MENU  
REV  
2.  
Press [  
“SKIP MODE” item  
] to select the  
LOCK  
OUT  
EXECUTE  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
• Move the cursor to select.  
SKIP  
2.  
3. 5.  
3.  
4.  
Turn the jog dial to select a Skip mode  
SEARCH MENU  
1.SEARCH SETTING  
2.DATE/TIME SEARCH  
3.ALARM/SENSOR SEARCH  
4.SKIP MODE  
LATEST  
“TIME” : Time Jump Setting  
“ALARM” : Alarm Jump Setting  
“EVENT” : Event Jump Setting  
Note  
ALARM  
1HOUR  
5.TIME JUMP SETTING  
• The “TIME JUMP SETTING” can be speci-  
fied by selecting one of the following:  
“1MIN”, “5MIN”, “10MIN”, “30MIN”,  
“1HOUR”, “4HOURS”, “1DAY”, “1WEEK”  
(“1HOUR” is selected in the factory set-  
tings.)  
Press [MENU] to end setting  
• This exits the menu to return to the normal screen.  
MENU  
5.  
Press the [SKIP] button when in the Playback  
mode  
• Pressing the button skips the playback image.  
Caution  
o : Jumps from the current play-  
SKIP  
• When in the Stop mode, pressing the [SKIP]  
button (o) jumps to the oldest event while  
pressing the [SKIP] button (i) jumps to  
the most current event.  
• Time Jump cannot be executed if the date/  
time is not set.  
back image to an old image and  
displays it in the Still mode.  
i : Jumps from the current play-  
back image to a new image and  
displays it in the Still mode.  
Set the date/time in advance.  
Page 18 ‘Setting the Date/Time’  
To select the Time Jump interval  
Select using the “TIME JUMP SET-  
TING” item in the “SEARCH MENU”  
screen.  
Page 114 ‘Skip Jump’  
SEARCH MENU  
1.SEARCH SETTING  
2.DATE/TIME SEARCH  
3.ALARM/SENSOR SEARCH  
4.SKIP MODE  
LATEST  
ALARM  
1HOUR  
5.TIME JUMP SETTING  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Routine Uses (continued)  
Viewing Recorded Images  
Enlarging the Still Image (Still Image Zoom)  
Still images can be viewed in an enlarged mode.  
Connect the monitor for viewing the playback  
image to the [VIDEO OUT] terminal.  
1.  
Playback the image  
• Perform Steps 1 ~ 3 of ‘Playing Back Recorded Images’ on page 38.  
2.  
Press the [STILL] button  
• Press the button at the point for which  
display is to be enlarged.  
CANCEL  
SEARCH  
MENU  
REV  
TIMER  
DISPLAY  
EXECUTE  
EC  
STOP  
PLAY  
STILL  
STILL  
2.3.  
4.  
3.  
Press and hold the [STILL] button for a while  
• A Guide Box for specifying the zoom area will be displayed on the  
screen.  
STILL  
Notes  
• Still image cannot be enlarged when play-  
back screen is in quad.  
• Pressing the [CANCEL] button during set-  
ting exits the Still Image Zoom mode.  
4.  
Move using the [  
• Move the Guide Box to the position on the image that is to be enlarged.  
• The position can be moved diagonally by pressing buttons simulta-  
neously.  
/
/
/
] buttons  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.  
Press the [STILL] button  
(x2 Zoom)  
CANCEL  
SEARCH  
MENU  
REV  
• Each time the [STILL] button is  
pressed, x2 Zoom or x4 Zoom in both  
vertical and horizontal directions can  
be selected.  
TIMER  
DISPLAY  
EXECUTE  
EC  
STOP  
PLAY  
STILL  
STILL  
5. 8.  
7. 6.  
(x4 Zoom)  
6.  
Press the [EXECUTE] button  
• The portion within the Guide Box will  
be displayed in full screen.  
EXECUTE  
Notes  
• Still image cannot be enlarged when play-  
back screen is in quad.  
• Pressing the [CANCEL] button during set-  
ting exits the Still Image Zoom mode.  
7.  
Scroll using the [  
• The zoom screen can be scrolled by pressing the buttons in the direc-  
tion to be viewed.  
/
/
/
] buttons  
• It can be moved diagonally by pressing buttons simultaneously.  
8.  
Press the [CANCEL] button  
• This exits the Zoom mode.  
• Press [PLAY] to return to the normal playback mode.  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Routine Uses (continued)  
Record Programming Using the Program Timer  
Weekly Timer (For starting recording on a specific day and time on a weekly basis)  
<Example>  
1.  
Press the [MENU] button  
• Follow procedures in ‘Changing Menu Settings’ on page 22 to display  
the “PROGRAM TIMER” Menu and the “WEEKLY TIMER” Menu  
screens.  
Execute recording from 8:00 a.m. every  
Friday ~ 5:00 p.m. every Saturday.  
Recording Mode  
• Cameras 1 - 4  
“FRAME RATE”  
“REC QUALITY”  
“AUDIO REC”  
: “12.5 IPS”  
: “H”  
: “A” (ON)  
MENU  
WEEKLY TIMER  
START END CAM1-4 CAM5-8 CAM9-12 CAM13-16 EXEC  
SUN  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
• Cameras 5 - 8  
MON  
TUE  
“FRAME RATE”  
“REC QUALITY”  
“AUDIO REC”  
: “25 IPS”  
: “N”  
: “A” (ON)  
WED  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
THU  
FRI  
SAT  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
DAY  
2.  
Press [  
] to select the line  
SUN MON TUE  
WED THU FRI  
SAT  
<= :RETURN  
[CANCEL]:CANCEL  
• Cameras 9 - 12  
“FRAME RATE”  
“REC QUALITY”  
“AUDIO REC”  
• Cameras 13 - 16  
“FRAME RATE”  
“REC QUALITY”  
“AUDIO REC”  
for which program is to be  
set  
: “2.5 IPS”  
: “N”  
: – (OFF)  
• For example, move the cursor to the third line. (Program can be set for  
any line.)  
: “1/2 IPS”  
: “B”  
: – (OFF)  
3.  
Turn the jog dial to adjust the starting day toFRI”  
(Friday)  
1.  
WEEKLY TIMER  
START END CAM1-4 CAM5-8 CAM9-12 CAM13-16 EXEC  
HDD  
FWD  
OPERATE  
SEARCH  
MENU  
SUN  
REV  
FWD  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
REV  
MON  
FRI  
WED  
THU  
LOCK  
OUT  
FRI  
SAT  
EXECUTE  
DAY  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
SUN MON TUE  
WED THU FRI  
SAT  
<= :RETURN  
[CANCEL]:CANCEL  
SKIP  
2.4.5.  
3.4.5.  
4.  
Press [  
] to move cursor to the Hour position  
under the “START” column, and turn the jog dial  
to select “08”  
To set the minute value of the starting  
time, press [ ] to move cursor to the  
Minute position and adjust by turning  
the jog dial.  
Notes  
WEEKLY TIMER  
START END CAM1-4 CAM5-8 CAM9-12 CAM13-16 EXEC  
SUN  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
• Only 1 line on the “WEEKLY TIMER” Menu is  
executed at any one time and there will be no  
simultaneous execution of multiple lines.  
• Upon pressing the [TIMER] button when there  
is an overlap in the program, the [OVERLAP]  
wording on the front display will light up, blink  
for about 10 seconds and continue to remain  
lit.When an overlap occurs between programs  
in the Weekly Timer and Date Timer, the  
[OVERLAP] wording will not light up. In this  
case, priority is given to the Date Timer set-  
tings. When “DAY” is set in the “WEEKLY  
TIMER” Menu, [OVERLAP] will not be dis-  
played even when it overlaps with other timer  
programs. In this case, priority will be given to  
the program with an earlier starting time.  
• It may take about 20 seconds before [OVER-  
LAP] is displayed.  
MON  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
08 00  
FRI  
** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
WED  
THU  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
FRI  
SAT  
DAY  
SUN MON TUE  
WED THU FRI  
SAT  
REV  
FWD  
<= :RETURN  
[CANCEL]:CANCEL  
5.  
Press [  
] to move cursor to the Day of theWeek  
position under the “END” column, and turn the  
jog dial to select “SAT” (SATURDAY)  
WEEKLY TIMER  
START END CAM1-4 CAM5-8 CAM9-12 CAM13-16 EXEC  
SUN  
MON  
FRI  
REV  
FWD  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
08 00  
SAT  
** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
WED  
THU  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
Caution  
FRI  
SAT  
DAY  
• Refer to the notes related to SummerTime.  
(Page 116)  
SUN MON TUE  
WED THU FRI  
SAT  
<= :RETURN  
[CANCEL]:CANCEL  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10.  
10.  
HDD  
FWD  
6.  
Press [  
] to move cursor to the Hour position  
OPERA  
CANCEL  
SEARCH  
MENU  
REV  
under the “END” column, and turn the jog dial to  
select “17”  
TIMER  
LOCK  
OUT  
DISPLAY  
EXECUTE  
VIDEO  
STILL  
To set the minute value of the ending  
time, press [ ] to move cursor to the  
Minute position and adjust by turning  
the jog dial.  
SKIP  
WEEKLY TIMER  
START END CAM1-4 CAM5-8 CAM9-12 CAM13-16 EXEC  
SUN  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
MON  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
08 00  
SAT  
17 00  
FRI  
** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
WED  
THU  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
6.7.8.9.  
6.7.8.  
FRI  
SAT  
REV  
FWD  
DAY  
SUN MON TUE  
WED THU FRI  
SAT  
<= :RETURN  
[CANCEL]:CANCEL  
Notes  
• The “FRAME RATE”, “REC QUALITY” and  
“AUDIO REC” settings of Block 1 (Cameras 1  
- 4) will be automatically copied to the remain-  
ing blocks.To make alterations, do so by turn-  
ing the jog dial.  
• In the case of camera blocks for which record-  
ing is not to be executed, press the [CANCEL]  
button to clear the settings.  
• Maximum duration of nonstop recording is less  
than 1 week.  
• “FRAME RATE”, “REC QUALITYand “AUDIO  
REC” settings can be specified for each Block  
(Cameras 1 - 4, Cameras 5 - 8, Cameras 9 -  
12, Cameras 13 - 16).  
7.  
8.  
9.  
Press [  
] and turn the jog dial to set “FRAME  
RATE”, “REC QUALITY” and “AUDIO REC”  
WEEKLY TIMER  
START END CAM1-4 CAM5-8 CAM9-12 CAM13-16 EXEC  
SUN  
MON  
FRI  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
REV  
FWD  
08 00  
SAT  
17 00 12.5 HA  
25 NA  
2.5 N-  
1/2B-  
**  
WED  
THU  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
FRI  
SAT  
DAY  
SUN MON TUE  
WED THU FRI  
SAT  
<= :RETURN  
[CANCEL]:CANCEL  
• Timer mode will not be activated if the “AU-  
DIO REC” setting remains as “*”. Make sure  
that this is changed to “A” or “–”.  
Press [  
] to move cursor to theEXECcolumn,  
and turn the jog dial to select “WLY”(WEEKLY)  
WEEKLY TIMER  
START END CAM1-4 CAM5-8 CAM9-12 CAM13-16 EXEC  
SUN  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
WEEKLY TIMER  
START END CAM1-4 CAM5-8 CAM9-12 CAM13-16 EXEC  
REV  
FWD  
MON  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
08 00  
SAT  
17 00 12.5 HA  
25 NA  
2.5 N-  
1/2B-  
TUE  
WED  
THU  
**  
SUN  
MON  
FRI  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** **** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
08 00  
SAT  
17 00 12.5 HA  
25 NA  
2.5 N-  
1/2B-  
WLYC  
W
FRI  
SAT  
WED  
THU  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
DAY  
FRI  
SAT  
SUN MON TUE  
WED THU FRI  
SAT  
<= :RETURN  
[CANCEL]:CAEL  
DAY  
SUN MON TUE  
WED THU FRI  
SAT  
<= :RETURN  
[CANCEL]:CANCEL  
12.5 H A  
“AUDIO REC”: ON  
“FRAME RATE”  
Move the cursor to<=: RETURNusing [  
press [  
] and  
“REC QUALITY”  
]
• When in theTimer Standby mode, turning OFF  
of the [OPERATE] button as well as recording  
operations will be disabled.  
• This displays the “PROGRAM TIMER”  
Menu screen.  
WEEKLY TIMER  
START END CAM1-4 CAM5-8 CAM9-12 CAM13-16 EXEC  
SUN  
MON  
FRI  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
08 00  
SAT  
17 00 12.5 HA  
25 NA  
2.5 N-  
1/2B-  
WLY  
• When an invalid timer has been set, this in-  
valid setting will be automatically deleted upon  
exiting theTimer screen.In this case, the “DE-  
LETE INVALID TIMER SETTING” message  
will be displayed on the screen. To clear this  
message, press the [CANCEL] button.  
WED  
THU  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
FRI  
SAT  
DAY  
SUN MON TUE  
WED THU FRI  
SAT  
<= :RETURN  
[CANCEL]:CANCEL  
10. Press [MENU] to return to the normal screen, and  
Caution  
press [TIMER]  
• When all the settings for cameras in a block  
(CAMERA 1 ~ CAMERA 4 / CAMERA 5 ~  
CAMERA 8 / CAMERA 9 ~ CAMERA 12 /  
CAMERA 13 ~ CAMERA 16) under the “REC  
MODE” Menu (Page 24) are set to “OFF”,  
ProgramTimer Recording will not be activated  
for that block.  
• The Timer indicator on the front display lights up and switches to the  
Timer Standby mode.  
• The Weekly Timer Program No. on the front display lights up.  
(The number of the line for which timer recording has been set will light  
up)  
TIMER  
MENU  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Routine Uses (continued)  
Record Programming Using the Program Timer  
Weekly Timer (For starting recording on a specific time of the day)  
<Example>  
Execute recording from 8:00 a.m. ~ 5:00  
p.m. everyday.  
Recording Mode  
• Cameras 1 - 4  
1.  
Press the [MENU] button  
• Follow procedures in ‘Changing Menu Settings’ on page 22 to display  
the “PROGRAM TIMER” Menu and the “WEEKLY TIMER” Menu  
screens.  
MENU  
“FRAME RATE”  
“REC QUALITY”  
“AUDIO REC”  
: “12.5 IPS”  
: “H”  
: “A” (ON)  
WEEKLY TIMER  
START END CAM1-4 CAM5-8 CAM9-12 CAM13-16 EXEC  
SUN  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
MON  
TUE  
WED  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
• Cameras 5 - 8  
THU  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
FRI  
SAT  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
“FRAME RATE”  
“REC QUALITY”  
“AUDIO REC”  
: “25 IPS”  
: “N”  
: “A” (ON)  
DAY  
2.  
Press [  
] to select the  
SUN MON TUE  
WED THU FRI  
SAT  
<= :RETURN  
[CANCEL]:CANCEL  
line for which program is to  
be set  
• Cameras 9 - 12  
“FRAME RATE”  
“REC QUALITY”  
“AUDIO REC”  
: “2.5 IPS”  
: “N”  
: – (OFF)  
• For example, move the cursor to the third line. (Program can be set for  
any line.)  
• Cameras 13 - 16  
“FRAME RATE”  
“REC QUALITY”  
“AUDIO REC”  
: “1/2 IPS”  
: “B”  
: – (OFF)  
3.  
Turn the jog dial to select “DAY”  
1.  
WEEKLY TIMER  
START END CAM1-4 CAM5-8 CAM9-12 CAM13-16 EXEC  
SUN  
MON  
DAY  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
REV  
FWD  
HDD  
OPERATE  
SEARCH  
MENU  
WED  
THU  
REV  
FWD  
FRI  
SAT  
LOCK  
DAY  
SUN MON TUE  
WED THU FRI  
SAT  
<= :RETURN  
[CANCEL]:CANCEL  
OUT  
EXECUTE  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
SKIP  
4.  
Press [  
] to move cursor to the Hour position  
2.4.5.  
3.4.5.  
under the “START” column, and turn the jog dial  
to select “08”  
To set the minute value of the starting  
time, press [ ] to move cursor to the  
Minute position and adjust by turning  
the jog dial.  
WEEKLY TIMER  
START END CAM1-4 CAM5-8 CAM9-12 CAM13-16 EXEC  
SUN  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
MON  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
08 00  
DAY  
WED  
THU  
** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
FRI  
SAT  
DAY  
SUN MON TUE  
WED THU FRI  
SAT  
Note  
REV  
FWD  
<= :RETURN  
[CANCEL]:CANCEL  
• When “DAY” is selected for the starting day  
of the week, specification of ending day will  
not be necessary.  
5.  
Press [  
] to move cursor to the Hour position  
Caution  
under the “END” column, and turn the jog dial to  
select “17”  
• Refer to the notes related to SummerTime.  
(Page 116)  
To set the minute value of the ending  
time, press [ ] to move cursor to the  
Minute position and adjust by turning  
the jog dial.  
WEEKLY TIMER  
START END CAM1-4 CAM5-8 CAM9-12 CAM13-16 EXEC  
SUN  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
MON  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
08 00  
17 00  
DAY  
WED  
THU  
**  
** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
FRI  
SAT  
REV  
FWD  
DAY  
SUN MON TUE  
WED THU FRI  
SAT  
<= :RETURN  
[CANCEL]:CANCEL  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10.  
10.  
HDD  
FWD  
OPERA  
CANCEL  
SEARCH  
MENU  
REV  
6.  
7.  
8.  
Press [  
] and turn the jog dial to set “FRAME  
TIMER  
LOCK  
OUT  
RATE”, “REC QUALITY” and “AUDIO REC”  
DISPLAY  
EXECUTE  
VIDEO  
STILL  
SKIP  
WEEKLY TIMER  
START END CAM1-4 CAM5-8 CAM9-12 CAM13-16 EXEC  
SUN  
MON  
DAY  
REV  
FWD  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
08 00  
17 00 12.5 HA  
25 NA  
2.5 N-  
1/2B-  
**  
**  
WED  
THU  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
6.7.8.9.  
6.7.8.  
FRI  
SAT  
DAY  
Notes  
SUN MON TUE  
WED THU FRI  
SAT  
<= :RETURN  
[CANCEL]:CANCEL  
• The “FRAME RATE”, “REC QUALITY” and  
“AUDIO RECsettings of Block 1 (Cameras  
1 - 4) will be automatically copied to the  
remaining blocks. To make alterations, do  
so by turning the jog dial.  
• In the case of camera blocks for which re-  
cording is not to be executed, press the  
[CANCEL] button to clear the settings.  
• “FRAME RATE”, “REC QUALITY” and “AU-  
DIO RECsettings can be specified for each  
Block (Cameras 1 - 4, Cameras 5 - 8, Cam-  
eras 9 - 12, Cameras 13 - 16).  
Press [  
] to move cursor to theEXECcolumn,  
and turn the jog dial to select “ON”  
WEEKLY TIMER  
START END CAM1-4 CAM5-8 CAM9-12 CAM13-16 EXEC  
SUN  
MON  
DAY  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
ON  
REV  
FWD  
08 00  
17 00 12.5 HA  
25 NA  
2.5 N-  
1/2B-  
**  
WED  
THU  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
FRI  
SAT  
DAY  
SUN MON TUE  
WED THU FRI  
SAT  
<= :RETURN  
[CANCEL]:CANCEL  
WEEKLY TIMER  
START END CAM1-4 CAM5-8 CAM9-12 CAM13-16 EXEC  
SUN  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
08 00  
MON  
SAT  
17 00 12.5 HA  
25 NA  
2.5 N-  
1/2B-  
TUE  
WED  
THU  
**  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** **** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
Press [  
] to move the cursor to the final line  
FRI  
SAT  
DAY  
• Check that “SUN” ~ “SAT” has been se-  
lected. When “– –” is displayed, select  
the day of the week to execute record-  
ing using [ ] and the jog dial.  
SUN MON TUE  
WED THU FRI  
SAT  
WEEKLY TIMER  
START END CAM1-4 CAM5-8 CAM9-12 CAM13-16 EXEC  
<= :RETURN  
[CANCEL]:CAEL  
SUN  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
MON  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
ON  
08 00  
17 00 12.5 HA  
25 NA  
2.5 N-  
1/2B-  
DAY  
WED  
THU  
**  
12.5 H A  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
FRI  
SAT  
“FRAME RATE” “AUDIO REC”: ON  
“REC QUALITY”  
DAY  
SUN MON TUE  
WED THU FRI  
SAT  
REV  
FWD  
<= :RETURN  
[CANCEL]:CANCEL  
• During “DAY” setting, ending time switches  
automatically to the following day if the end-  
ing time set is earlier than the starting time.  
• When an invalid timer has been set, this  
invalid setting will be automatically deleted  
upon exiting the Timer screen. In this case,  
the “DELETE INVALID TIMER SETTING”  
message will be displayed on the screen.  
To clear this message, press the [CANCEL]  
button.  
9.  
Move the cursor to<=: RETURNusing [  
press [  
] and  
]
• This displays the “PROGRAM TIMER”  
Menu screen.  
WEEKLY TIMER  
START END CAM1-4 CAM5-8 CAM9-12 CAM13-16 EXEC  
SUN  
MON  
DAY  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
ON  
08 00  
17 00 12.5 HA  
25 NA  
2.5 N-  
1/2B-  
**  
WED  
THU  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
FRI  
SAT  
DAY  
Caution  
SUN MON TUE  
WED THU FRI  
SAT  
<= :RETURN  
[CANCEL]:CANCEL  
• Pay attention when changing the day of the  
week at the final line in Step 8.  
Other record program settings for which  
“DAYhas been selected will also be altered.  
• Maximum duration of nonstop recording is  
less than 24 hours.  
• When all the settings for cameras in a block  
(CAMERA 1 ~ CAMERA 4 / CAMERA 5 ~  
CAMERA 8 / CAMERA 9 ~ CAMERA12 /  
CAMERA 13 ~ CAMERA16) under the  
“REC MODE” Menu (Page 24) are set to  
“OFF”, Program Timer Recording will not  
be activated for that block.  
10.Press [MENU] to return to the normal screen, and  
press [TIMER]  
• The Timer indicator on the front display lights up and switches to the  
Timer Standby mode.  
• The Weekly Timer Program No. on the front display lights up.  
(The number of the line for which timer recording has been set will light  
up)  
TIMER  
MENU  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Routine Uses (continued)  
Record Programming Using the Program Timer  
Weekly Timer (For starting recording on a specific day of the week and time)  
<Example>  
1.  
Press the [MENU] button  
• Follow procedures in ‘Changing Menu Settings’ on page 22 to display  
the “PROGRAM TIMER” Menu and the “WEEKLY TIMER” Menu  
screens.  
Execute recording from 9:30 a.m. ~ 10:30  
p.m. on every Monday, Wednesday and  
Friday.  
Recording Mode  
• Cameras 1 - 4  
MENU  
“FRAME RATE”  
“REC QUALITY”  
“AUDIO REC”  
: “12.5 IPS”  
: “H”  
: “A” (ON)  
WEEKLY TIMER  
START END CAM1-4 CAM5-8 CAM9-12 CAM13-16 EXEC  
SUN  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
MON  
TUE  
WED  
• Cameras 5 - 8  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
THU  
FRI  
SAT  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
“FRAME RATE”  
“REC QUALITY”  
“AUDIO REC”  
: “25 IPS”  
: “N”  
: “A” (ON)  
DAY  
2.  
Press [  
line for which program is to  
be set  
] to select the  
SUN MON TUE  
WED THU FRI  
SAT  
<= :RETURN  
[CANCEL]:CANCEL  
• Cameras 9 - 12  
“FRAME RATE”  
“REC QUALITY”  
“AUDIO REC”  
: “2.5 IPS”  
: “N”  
: – (OFF)  
• For example, move the cursor to select the first line.  
(Program can be set for any line.)  
• Cameras 13 - 16  
“FRAME RATE”  
“REC QUALITY”  
“AUDIO REC”  
: “1/2 IPS”  
: “B”  
: – (OFF)  
3.  
Turn the jog dial to select “DAY”  
1.  
WEEKLY TIMER  
START END CAM1-4 CAM5-8 CAM9-12 CAM13-16 EXEC  
DAY  
MON  
TUE  
WED  
THU  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
REV  
FWD  
HDD  
OPERATE  
SEARCH  
MENU  
REV  
FWD  
FRI  
SAT  
LOCK  
DAY  
SUN MON TUE  
WED THU FRI  
SAT  
OUT  
EXECUTE  
<= :RETURN  
[CANCEL]:CANCEL  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
SKIP  
4.  
Press [  
] to move cursor to the Hour position  
2.4.5.  
3.4.5.  
under the “START” column, and turn the jog dial  
to select “09”  
To set the minute value of the starting  
time, press [ ] to move cursor to the  
Minute position and adjust by turning  
the jog dial.  
WEEKLY TIMER  
START END CAM1-4 CAM5-8 CAM9-12 CAM13-16 EXEC  
09 30  
DAY  
MON  
TUE  
WED  
THU  
** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
FRI  
SAT  
DAY  
Note  
SUN MON TUE  
WED THU FRI  
SAT  
REV  
FWD  
<= :RETURN  
[CANCEL]:CANCEL  
• When “DAY” is selected for the starting day  
of the week, specification of ending day will  
not be necessary.  
5.  
Press [  
] to move cursor to the Hour position  
under the “END” column, and turn the jog dial to  
select “22”  
Caution  
• Refer to the notes related to SummerTime.  
(Page 116)  
To set the minute value of the ending  
time, press [ ] to move cursor to the  
Minute position and adjust by turning  
the jog dial.  
WEEKLY TIMER  
START END CAM1-4 CAM5-8 CAM9-12 CAM13-16 EXEC  
09 30  
22 30  
** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
DAY  
MON  
TUE  
WED  
THU  
**  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
FRI  
SAT  
REV  
FWD  
DAY  
SUN MON TUE  
WED THU FRI  
SAT  
<= :RETURN  
[CANCEL]:CANCEL  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10.  
10.  
HDD  
FWD  
OPERA  
CANCEL  
SEARCH  
MENU  
REV  
6.  
7.  
8.  
Press [  
] and turn the jog dial to set “FRAME  
TIMER  
LOCK  
OUT  
RATE”, “REC QUALITY” and “AUDIO REC”  
DISPLAY  
EXECUTE  
VIDEO  
STILL  
SKIP  
WEEKLY TIMER  
START END CAM1-4 CAM5-8 CAM9-12 CAM13-16 EXEC  
REV  
FWD  
09 30 22 30 15 HA 15 HA 15 HA 15 HA WLY  
DAY  
MON  
TUE  
WED  
THU  
**  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
6.7.8.9.  
6.7.8.  
FRI  
SAT  
Notes  
DAY  
SUN MON TUE  
WED THU FRI  
SAT  
<= :RETURN  
[CANCEL]:CANCEL  
• The “FRAME RATE”, “REC QUALITY” and  
“AUDIO RECsettings of Block 1 (Cameras  
1 - 4) will be automatically copied to the  
remaining blocks. To make alterations, do  
so by turning the jog dial.  
• In the case of camera blocks for which re-  
cording is not to be executed, press the  
[CANCEL] button to clear the settings.  
• “FRAME RATE”, “REC QUALITY” and “AU-  
DIO RECsettings can be specified for each  
Block (Cameras 1 - 4, Cameras 5 - 8, Cam-  
eras 9 - 12, Cameras 13 - 16).  
Press [  
] to move cursor to theEXECcolumn,  
and turn the jog dial to select “ON”  
WEEKLY TIMER  
START END CAM1-4 CAM5-8 CAM9-12 CAM13-16 EXEC  
09 30 22 30 12.5 HA 25 NA 2.5 N- 1/2B- ON  
DAY  
MON  
TUE  
WED  
THU  
REV  
FWD  
**  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
FRI  
SAT  
DAY  
SUN MON TUE  
WED THU FRI  
SAT  
<= :RETURN  
[CANCEL]:CANCEL  
WEEKLY TIMER  
START END CAM1-4 CAM5-8 CAM9-12 CAM13-16 EXEC  
SUN  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
MON  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
08 00  
SAT  
17 00 12.5 HA  
25 NA  
2.5 N-  
1/2B-  
TUE  
WED  
THU  
**  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** **** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** * *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
Press [  
] to move the cursor to the final line  
FRI  
SAT  
DAY  
• Use [ ] and the jog dial to select the  
day of the week to execute recording.  
Select “– –” for days of the week for  
which recording is not to be executed.  
SUN MON TUE  
WED THU FRI  
SAT  
<= :RETURN  
[CANCEL]:CAEL  
WEEKLY TIMER  
START END CAM1-4 CAM5-8 CAM9-12 CAM13-16 EXEC  
09 30  
22 30 12.5 HA  
25 NA  
2.5 N-  
1/2B-  
ON  
DAY  
MON  
TUE  
WED  
THU  
**  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
12.5 H A  
FRI  
SAT  
“AUDIO REC”: ON  
“FRAME RATE”  
DAY  
REV  
FWD  
--  
MON --  
WED --  
FRI  
--  
“REC QUALITY”  
<= :RETURN  
[CANCEL]:CANCEL  
• During “DAY” setting, ending time switches  
automatically to the following day if the end-  
ing time set is earlier than the starting time.  
• When an invalid timer has been set, this  
invalid setting will be automatically deleted  
upon exiting the Timer screen. In this case,  
the “DELETE INVALID TIMER SETTING”  
message will be displayed on the screen.  
To clear this message, press the [CANCEL]  
button.  
9.  
Move the cursor to<=: RETURNusing [  
press [  
] and  
]
WEEKLY TIMER  
• This displays the “PROGRAM TIMER”  
Menu screen.  
START END CAM1-4 CAM5-8 CAM9-12 CAM13-16 EXEC  
09 30 22 30 12.5 HA 25 NA 2.5 N- 1/2B- ON  
DAY  
MON  
TUE  
WED  
THU  
**  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
FRI  
SAT  
DAY  
--  
MON --  
WED --  
FRI  
--  
<= :RETURN  
[CANCEL]:CANCEL  
Caution  
• Pay attention when changing the day of the  
week at the final line in Step 8.  
Other record program settings for which  
“DAYhas been selected will also be altered.  
• When all the settings for cameras in a block  
(CAMERA 1 ~ CAMERA 4 / CAMERA 5 ~  
CAMERA 8 / CAMERA 9 ~ CAMERA 12 /  
CAMERA 13 ~ CAMERA 16) under the  
“REC MODE” Menu (Page 24) are set to  
“OFF”, Program Timer Recording will not  
be activated for that block.  
10.Press [MENU] to return to the normal screen, and  
press [TIMER]  
• The Timer indicator on the front display lights up.  
• The Weekly Timer Program No. on the front display lights up.  
(The number of the line for which timer recording has been set will light  
up)  
TIMER  
MENU  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Routine Uses (continued)  
Record Programming Using the Program Timer  
Date Timer  
For executing the recording of a program on different dates.  
1.  
Press the [MENU] button  
• Follow procedures in ‘Changing Menu Settings’ on page 22 to display  
<Example>  
Execute recording from 8:00 a.m. ~ 11:00  
p.m. on 1 October and 10 October.  
Recording Mode  
the “PROGRAM TIMER” Menu and the “DATE TIMER” Menu screens.  
MENU  
• Cameras 1 - 4  
DATE TIMER  
“FRAME RATE”  
“REC QUALITY”  
“AUDIO REC”  
: “8.3 IPS”  
: “H”  
: “A” (ON)  
START END CAM1-4 CAM5-8 CAM9-12 CAM13-16 EXEC  
** **  
1.  
** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
-
9.  
-
** **  
** **  
2.  
-
10.  
11.  
12.  
13.  
14.  
15.  
16.  
-
** **  
** **  
3.  
-
-
** **  
** **  
4.  
-
-
** **  
** **  
5.  
-
-
• Cameras 5 - 8  
** **  
** **  
2.  
3.  
Press [  
] to select the line  
6.  
-
-
** **  
** **  
7.  
-
-
** **  
** **  
Do not record  
• Cameras 9 - 12  
“FRAME RATE”  
“REC QUALITY”  
“AUDIO REC”  
-
8.  
-
for which program is to be  
set  
** **  
** **  
<= :RETURN  
[CANCEL]:CANCEL  
: “4.2 IPS”  
: “B”  
: – (OFF)  
For example, move the cursor to select the first line.  
(Program can be set for any line.)  
• Cameras 13 - 16  
Do not record  
Turn the jog dial to set the  
starting Day column to  
“1”  
DATE TIMER  
START END CAM1-4 CAM5-8 CAM9-12 CAM13-16 EXEC  
** **  
1.  
** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
01  
-
-
9.  
-
**  
** **  
2.  
10.  
11.  
12.  
13.  
14.  
15.  
16.  
-
** **  
** **  
1.  
3.  
-
-
** **  
** **  
4.  
-
-
** **  
** **  
5.  
-
-
** **  
** **  
6.  
-
-
** **  
** **  
7.  
-
-
REV  
FWD  
** **  
** **  
-
8.  
-
** **  
** **  
HDD  
OPERATE  
<= :RETURN  
SEARCH  
MENU  
REV  
FWD  
[CANCEL]:CANCEL  
LOCK  
OUT  
VIDEO  
EXECUTE  
AUDIO  
SKIP  
4.  
5.  
Press [  
] to move cur-  
DATE TIMER  
START END CAM1-4 CAM5-8 CAM9-12 CAM13-16 EXEC  
sor to the starting Month  
position, and turn the jog  
dial to select “10”  
2.4.5.6. 3.4.5.6.  
** **  
1.  
** ** ** ***  
*** ** *** ** *** **  
**  
01  
-
-
10  
9.  
-
** **  
2.  
10.  
11.  
12.  
13.  
14.  
15.  
16.  
-
** **  
** **  
3.  
-
-
** **  
** **  
4.  
-
-
** **  
** **  
5.  
-
-
** **  
** **  
6.  
-
-
** **  
** **  
7.  
-
-
** **  
** **  
-
8.  
-
** **  
** **  
<= :RETURN  
REV  
FWD  
[CANCEL]:CANCEL  
DATE TIMER  
START END CAM1-4 CAM5-8 CAM9-12 CAM13-16 EXEC  
Perform setting for other  
Day and Month items  
accordingly  
** **  
1.  
** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
01  
10  
-
-
-
10  
10  
9.  
-
** **  
2.  
10.  
11.  
12.  
13.  
14.  
15.  
16.  
-
** **  
3.  
-
** **  
** **  
4.  
-
-
** **  
** **  
5.  
-
-
** **  
** **  
6.  
-
-
** **  
** **  
7.  
-
-
• Repeat Steps 2 ~ 4 to set the Day and  
Month.  
** **  
** **  
-
8.  
-
** **  
** **  
<= :RETURN  
[CANCEL]:CANCEL  
Caution  
6.  
Press [  
] to move cursor to the Hour position  
• Refer to the notes related to SummerTime.  
(Page 116)  
under the “START” column, and turn the jog dial  
to select “08”  
DATE TIMER  
START END CAM1-4 CAM5-8 CAM9-12 CAM13-16 EXEC  
To set the minute value of the starting  
time, press [ ] to move cursor to the  
Minute position and adjust by turning  
the jog dial.  
08 00  
** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
5.  
6.  
7.  
8.  
01  
10  
-
-
-
10  
10  
9.  
-
** **  
10.  
11.  
12.  
13.  
14.  
15.  
16.  
-
** **  
-
** **  
** **  
-
-
** **  
** **  
-
-
** **  
** **  
-
-
** **  
** **  
-
-
** **  
** **  
-
-
** **  
** **  
<= :RETURN  
REV  
FWD  
[CANCEL]:CANCEL  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11.  
11.  
7.  
Press [  
] to move cursor to the Hour position  
HDD  
FWD  
OPER  
CANCEL  
SEARCH  
MENU  
REV  
under the “END” column, and turn the jog dial to  
select “23”  
TIMER  
LOC  
OU  
DISPLAY  
EXECUTE  
VIDEO  
To set the minute value of the ending  
time, press [ ] to move cursor to the  
Minute position and adjust by turning  
the jog dial.  
L
DATE TIMER  
START END CAM1-4 CAM5-8 CAM9-12 CAM13-16 EXEC  
SKIP  
08 00  
23 00  
** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
5.  
6.  
7.  
8.  
01  
10  
-
-
-
10  
10  
9.  
-
** **  
10.  
11.  
12.  
13.  
14.  
15.  
16.  
-
** **  
-
** **  
** **  
-
-
** **  
** **  
-
-
7.8.9.10. 7.8.9.  
** **  
** **  
-
-
** **  
** **  
-
-
REV  
FWD  
** **  
** **  
-
-
** **  
** **  
<= :RETURN  
Notes  
[CANCEL]:CANCEL  
• The “FRAME RATE”, “REC QUALITY” and  
“AUDIO RECsettings of Block 1 (Cameras  
1 - 4) will be automatically copied to the  
remaining blocks. To make alterations, do  
so by turning the jog dial.  
• In the case of camera blocks for which re-  
cording is not to be executed, press the  
[CANCEL] button to clear the settings.  
• Maximum duration of nonstop recording will  
last for less than 24 hours.  
8.  
9.  
Press [  
] and turn the jog dial to set “FRAME  
RATE”, “REC QUALITY” and “AUDIO REC”  
DATE TIMER  
START END CAM1-4 CAM5-8 CAM9-12 CAM13-16 EXEC  
REV  
FWD  
08 00  
23 00 8.3HA  
4.2B  
** ***  
9.  
** *** **  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
5.  
6.  
7.  
8.  
01  
10  
-
-
-
10  
10  
-
** **  
10.  
11.  
12.  
13.  
14.  
15.  
16.  
-
** **  
-
** **  
** **  
• “FRAME RATE”, “REC QUALITY” and “AU-  
DIO REC”settings can be specified for each  
Block (Cameras 1 - 4, Cameras 5 - 8, Cam-  
eras 9 - 12, Cameras 13 - 16).  
-
-
** **  
** **  
-
-
** **  
** **  
-
-
** **  
** **  
-
-
** **  
** **  
-
-
** **  
** **  
<= :RETURN  
[CANCEL]:CANCEL  
DATE TIMER  
START END CAM1-4 CAM5-8 CAM9-12 CAM13-16 EXEC  
08 00  
23 00 8.3HA  
4.2B  
ON  
** ***  
9.  
** ***  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
5.  
6.  
7.  
8.  
01  
10  
-
-
-
10  
10  
-
Press [  
under the “EXEC” column  
] and turn the jog dial to select “ON”  
** **  
10.  
11.  
12.  
13.  
14.  
15.  
16.  
-
** **  
** **  
-
** **  
-
-
** **  
** **  
-
-
** **  
** **  
-
-
** **  
** **  
-
-
-
** **  
** **  
** **  
-
DATE TIMER  
START END CAM1-4 CAM5-8 CAM9-12 CAM13-16 EXEC  
** **  
<= :RETURN  
[CANCEL]:CANCEL  
08 00  
23 00 8.3HA  
4.2B  
ON  
** ***  
** ***  
REV  
FWD  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
5.  
6.  
7.  
8.  
01  
10  
-
-
-
10  
10  
9.  
-
** **  
10.  
11.  
12.  
13.  
14.  
15.  
16.  
-
** **  
-
8.3 H A  
** **  
** **  
-
-
** **  
** **  
-
-
** **  
** **  
-
-
** **  
** **  
“FRAME RATE” “AUDIO REC”: ON  
“REC QUALITY”  
-
-
** **  
** **  
-
-
** **  
** **  
<= :RETURN  
[CANCEL]:CANCEL  
• Ending time switches automatically to the  
following day if the ending time set is ear-  
lier than the starting time.  
• When an invalid timer has been set, this  
invalid setting will be automatically deleted  
upon exiting the Timer screen. In this case,  
the “DELETE INVALID TIMER SETTING”  
message will be displayed on the screen.  
To clear this message, press the [CANCEL]  
button.  
10.Move the cursor to<=:RETURNusing [  
] and  
press [  
]
DATE TIMER  
START END CAM1-4 CAM5-8 CAM9-12 CAM13-16 EXEC  
08 00  
23 00 8.3HA  
4.2B  
ON  
** ***  
9.  
** ***  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
5.  
6.  
7.  
8.  
01  
10  
-
-
-
10  
10  
-
** **  
** **  
** **  
10.  
11.  
12.  
13.  
14.  
15.  
16.  
-
-
** **  
-
-
** **  
** **  
-
-
** **  
** **  
-
-
** **  
** **  
-
-
-
** **  
** **  
** **  
-
** **  
<= :RETURN  
[CANCEL]:CANCEL  
Caution  
• When all the settings for cameras in a block  
(CAMERA 1 ~ CAMERA 4 / CAMERA 5 ~  
CAMERA 8 / CAMERA 9 ~ CAMERA12 /  
CAMERA 13 ~ CAMERA16) under the  
“REC MODE” Menu (Page 24) are set to  
“OFF”, Program Timer Recording will not  
be activated for that block.  
11.Press [MENU] to return to the normal screen, and  
press [TIMER]  
• The Timer indicator on the front display lights up.  
TIMER  
MENU  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Routine Uses (continued)  
Record Programming Using the Program Timer  
Canceling a Record Program  
1.  
Press the [MENU] button  
• Follow procedures in ‘Changing Menu Settings’ on page 22 to display  
the “PROGRAM TIMER” Menu and the “WEEKLY TIMER” Menu  
screens.  
3.  
1.  
HDD  
FWD  
OPER  
CANCEL  
SEARCH  
MENU  
REV  
MENU  
TIMER  
LO  
OU  
WEEKLY TIMER  
START END CAM1-4 CAM5-8 CAM9-12 CAM13-16 EXEC  
SUN  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
DISPLAY  
EXECUTE  
MON  
VIDEO  
LL  
TUE  
FRI  
SKIP  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
THU  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
FRI  
SAT  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
DAY  
SUN MON TUE  
WED THU FRI  
SAT  
2.  
Press [  
record program to delete  
] to select the  
<= :RETURN  
[CANCEL]:CANCEL  
2.  
• For example, delete the fourth line of the record program.  
Notes  
• Move the cursor away from the “CAM” 1-4 /  
5-8 / 9-12 / 13-16 items and press the [CAN-  
CEL] button to clear all settings for a par-  
ticular day.  
• If the [CANCEL] button is pressed with the  
cursor inside any of the “CAM” 1-4 / 5-8 /  
9-12 / 13-16 columns, only that camera  
block will be cleared.  
3.  
Press the [CANCEL] button  
• The selected record program will be deleted.  
CANCEL  
Changing a Record Program  
1.  
Press the [MENU] button  
• Follow procedures in ‘Changing Menu Settings’ on page 22 to display  
the “PROGRAM TIMER” Menu and the “WEEKLY TIMER” Menu  
screens.  
1.  
HDD  
OPER  
CANCEL  
SEARCH  
MENU  
MENU  
REV  
FWD  
WEEKLY TIMER  
START END CAM1-4 CAM5-8 CAM9-12 CAM13-16 EXEC  
TIMER  
LOC  
OU  
DAY  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
MON  
TUE  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
09  
23 00 8.3HA  
8.3NA  
4.2B-  
12.5B  
ON  
00 **  
FRI  
DISPLAY  
EXECUTE  
VIDEO  
THU  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
L
FRI  
SAT  
SKIP  
DAY  
SUN MON TUE  
WED THU FRI  
SAT  
2.  
Press [  
record program to alter  
] to select the  
<= :RETURN  
[CANCEL]:CANCEL  
2.3.  
3.  
• For example, alter the fourth line of the record program.  
3.  
Press [  
item and alter by turning  
the jog dial  
] to select the  
WEEKLY TIMER  
START END CAM1-4 CAM5-8 CAM9-12 CAM13-16 EXEC  
DAY  
MON  
TUE  
FRI  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
ON  
09 00 SAT 23 00 8.3HA  
8.3NA  
4.2B-  
12.5B  
THU  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** *** ** *** ** *** ** *** **  
FRI  
SAT  
DAY  
REV  
FWD  
SUN MON TUE  
WED THU FRI  
SAT  
<= :RETURN  
[CANCEL]:CANCEL  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Useful Features  
Hard Disk Maintenance  
When power failure occurs while in the Recording mode or Sensor Record Standby mode, or when failure occurs in the recorded  
data of the hard disk, recording/playback may not function properly. To repair the hard disk, two types of scan disk functions are  
available on VR-716:  
• Auto Scan Disk  
Scans the hard disk automatically upon turning on the power.  
• Manual Scan Disk  
Performs manual scanning of the hard disk. Perform Manual Scan Disk regularly when the “AUTO SCAN DISK” item in the menu  
is set to “OFF” or when the power of the equipment remains on for extensive periods of time.  
Scanning Hard Disk Data (“AUTO SCAN DISK”)  
1.  
Press the [MENU] button  
• Follow procedures in ‘Changing Menu Settings’ on page 22 to display  
the “DISK UTILITY/MAINTENANCE” Menu and the “DISK UTILITY”  
screen.  
1.4.  
HDD  
FWD  
OPERATE  
SEARCH  
MENU  
REV  
LOCK  
OUT  
MENU  
DISK UTILITY  
1.AUTO SCAN DISK  
2.MANUAL SCAN DISK  
3.DEFRAG DATABASE  
4.FORMAT  
OFF  
OFF  
EXECUTE  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
SKIP  
5.MIRRORING  
2.  
Press [  
“AUTO SCAN DISK” item  
] to select the  
2.  
3.  
• Move the cursor to select.  
3.  
Turn the jog dial to select “ON”  
DISK UTILITY  
REV  
FWD  
1.AUTO SCAN DISK  
2.MANUAL SCAN DISK  
3.DEFRAG DATABASE  
4.FORMAT  
ON  
OFF  
5.MIRRORING  
Notes  
To cancel the Auto Scan Disk operation,  
press the [CANCEL] button.  
• Scan the hard disk once a month if record-  
ing is continuously executed.  
4.  
Press [MENU] to end setting  
• The display returns to the normal screen.  
• Scanning will be executed when the power is turned on.  
MENU  
Caution  
• Scanning may take a longer time if the data  
volume of recorded events are heavy or if  
there is a large number of events. (Approx.  
a few hours)  
• Recording, playback and search are not  
possible when Auto Scan Disk is executed.  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Useful Features (continued)  
Hard Disk Maintenance  
Scanning Hard Disk Data (“MANUAL SCAN DISK”)  
1.  
Press the [MENU] button  
• Follow procedures in ‘Changing Menu Settings’ on page 22 to display  
1.  
the “DISK UTILITY/MAINTENANCE” Menu and the “DISK UTILITY”  
screen.  
HDD  
FWD  
OPERATE  
SEARCH  
MENU  
REV  
MENU  
LOCK  
OUT  
DISK UTILITY  
1.AUTO SCAN DISK  
2.MANUAL SCAN DISK  
3.DEFRAG DATABASE  
4.FORMAT  
OFF  
OFF  
EXECUTE  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
5.MIRRORING  
SKIP  
2.  
Press [  
“MANUAL SCAN DISK”  
item  
] to select the  
2. 4.  
3.  
• Move the cursor to select.  
3.  
4.  
Turn the jog dial to select “ON”  
DISK UTILITY  
1.AUTO SCAN DISK  
2.MANUAL SCAN DISK  
3.DEFRAG DATABASE  
4.FORMAT  
OFF  
ON  
REV  
FWD  
5.MIRRORING  
Press the [EXECUTE] button  
• This starts the scanning.  
Screen Display when in the Disk  
Scanning Mode  
EXECUTE  
28-07-2003 MO 11:35:23  
100%  
AL-0  
SCANDISK  
%
***  
Notes  
---CANCEL WITH [CANCEL]---  
To cancel the Manual Scan Disk operation,  
press the [CANCEL] button.  
• Scan the hard disk once a month if record-  
ing is continuously executed.  
Caution  
• Scanning may take a longer time if the data  
volume of recorded events are heavy or if  
there is a large number of events. (Approx.  
a few hours)  
• Recording, playback and search are not  
possible when Manual Scan Disk is ex-  
ecuted.  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Defrag  
When alarm or sensor recording is performed repeatedly with Repeat Recording set to “ON”, data in the hard disk may become  
fragmented. Continued use of such data may cause files to split up and recorded into free space, thereby giving rise to fragmenta-  
tion or decay of data and subsequently slows down the speed extremely during hard disk search. This is where the “DEFRAG  
DATABASE” feature comes into play in the maintenance of the hard disk.  
It is also recommended to “FORMAT” (Initialize) the hard disk on a regular basis to avoid data fragmentation. When there is  
insufficient hard disk space, create a backup data and format the disk to create space for the recorded data.  
1.  
Press the [MENU] button  
• Follow procedures in ‘Changing Menu Settings’ on page 22 to display  
the “DISK UTILITY/MAINTENANCE” Menu and the “DISK UTILITY”  
screen.  
1.  
HDD  
FWD  
OPER  
CANCEL  
SEARCH  
MENU  
REV  
MENU  
DISK UTILITY  
TIMER  
LOC  
OUT  
1.AUTO SCAN DISK  
2.MANUAL SCAN DISK  
3.DEFRAG DATABASE  
4.FORMAT  
OFF  
OFF  
DISPLAY  
EXECUTE  
VIDEO  
LL  
5.MIRRORING  
SKIP  
2.  
Select the “DEFRAG DA-  
TABASE” item using [  
2.3 4.5 3.  
]
and press [  
]
• This displays the “DEFRAG DATABASE” Menu.  
3.  
SelectDEFRAGusing [  
the jog dial to select “YES”.  
], press [  
] and turn  
DEFRAG DATABASE  
DEFRAG AUTO MODE  
REV  
FWD  
DATE TIME SET  
01  
00 OFF  
DEFRAG  
YES  
SET [YES] FOR DEFRAG  
4.  
Press the [EXECUTE] button  
• This displays the “DEFRAG CONFIRMATION” Screen.  
Notes  
EXECUTE  
DEFRAG CONFIRMATION  
• Perform defrag if search operation takes  
more than 30 seconds.  
• Disabled when in the Recording mode.(Not  
including automatic execution.)  
START DEFRAG!!  
START?  
To enable automatic execution, select the  
“DEFRAG AUTO MODE” item, specify the  
date and time and set to “ON”. Defrag will  
run automatically on the specified date/time.  
[CANCEL]:CANCEL  
[EXEC]:START  
5.  
Press the [EXECUTE]  
button again  
Caution  
DEFRAG DATABASE...WAIT  
COMPLETED  
• Defrag starts. Upon completion, a  
• It will interrupt the recording and perform  
defrag if the time of the automatic execu-  
tion is reached during recording.  
“COMPLETED” message will be dis-  
played on the screen.  
EXECUTE  
Recording will be resumed automatically af-  
ter defrag has been completed.  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Useful Features (continued)  
Initializing the Hard Disk (“FORMAT”)  
Recording may fail if there is insufficient space on the hard disk. In this case, format the hard disk to create space.  
1.  
1.  
Press the [MENU] button  
• Follow procedures in ‘Changing Menu Settings’ on page 22 to display  
the “DISK UTILITY/MAINTENANCE” Menu and the “DISK UTILITY”  
screen.  
HDD  
FWD  
OPER  
CANCEL  
SEARCH  
MENU  
REV  
TIMER  
LOC  
OUT  
MENU  
DISPLAY  
EXECUTE  
VIDEO  
LL  
DISK UTILITY  
SKIP  
1.AUTO SCAN DISK  
2.MANUAL SCAN DISK  
3.DEFRAG DATABASE  
4.FORMAT  
OFF  
OFF  
5.MIRRORING  
2.3 4.5 3.  
2.  
Select the “FORMAT” item  
using [ ] and press [  
]
• This displays the “FORMAT” screen.  
3.  
Use [  
/
] to select the hard disk to format,  
and turn the jog dial to select “YES”  
FORMAT  
BUILT-IN HDD 1 :  
76GB OK  
76GB OK  
YES  
YES  
REV  
FWD  
BUILT-IN HDD 2 :  
EXTERNAL HDD 1 :  
EXTERNAL HDD 2 :  
EXTERNAL HDD 3 :  
EXTERNAL HDD 4 :  
START FORMAT  
NO  
ALL RECORDED HDD DATA IS DELETED!!  
1.SET FORMATTING HDD TO [YES]  
2.SET [START FORMAT] TO [YES]  
Note  
• The hard disk capacity displayed on the  
screen is calculated based on 1 GB = (1024)3  
Bytes.Therefore it is displayed as lower than  
the actual capacity.  
4.  
Select “START FORMAT”, turn the jog dial to se-  
lect “YES” and press the [EXECUTE] button.  
• This displays the “FORMAT CONFIR-  
MATION” Screen.  
FORMAT CONFIRMATION  
EXECUTE  
ALL RECORDED HDD DATA IS DELETED!!  
START?  
[CANCEL]:CANCEL  
[EXEC]:START  
Caution  
• All recorded events will be deleted upon for-  
matting. Ensure to create a backup for im-  
portant event records.  
• At the screen upon completion of “FOR-  
MAT”, never unplug the power cord.  
5.  
Press the [EXECUTE]  
button again  
BUILD-IN HDD 1 :  
BUILD-IN HDD 2 :  
MIRRORING SETING  
FORMAT SUCCEEDED  
FORMAT SUCCEEDED  
• Formatting starts. Upon completion,  
the “FORMAT SUCCEEDED” screen  
will be displayed.  
HDD UPDATE IS COMPLETED  
PRESS [OPERATE] FOR OPERATION  
• Press [OPERATE] button to start.  
EXECUTE  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hard Disk Mirroring  
Mirroring refers to recording the same data in the 2 built-in hard disks. In this way, recorded data can be secured even if data in one  
of the hard disks is damaged.  
Mirroring Setting  
1.  
1. Press the [MENU] button  
HDD  
FWD  
• Follow procedures in ‘Changing Menu Settings’ on page 22 to display  
the “DISK UTILITY/MAINTENANCE” Menu and the “DISK UTILITY”  
screen.  
OPERATE  
CANCEL  
SEARCH  
MENU  
REV  
TIMER  
LOCK  
OUT  
DISPLAY  
EXECUTE  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
MENU  
DISK UTILITY  
SKIP  
1.AUTO SCAN DISK  
2.MANUAL SCAN DISK  
3.DEFRAG DATABASE  
4.FORMAT  
OFF  
OFF  
5.MIRRORING  
2. 3.4. 3.  
2. Select theMIRRORING”  
item using [ ] and  
press [  
MIRRORING  
BUILT-IN HDD 1 :  
BUILT-IN HDD 2 :  
]
76GB OK  
76GB OK  
• This displays the “MIRRORING” Menu  
screen.  
YES  
MIRRORING SETTING  
ALL HDD DATA WILL BE DELETED!!  
NO MIRRORING SETTING  
SET [YES] FOR MIRRORING SETTING  
[EXEC]:START MIRROR  
3. Turn the jog dial to select “YES” and press  
[EXECUTE] button  
Notes  
• Mirroring settings can be undone in the Mir-  
roring mode. (Page 60)  
• This displays the “MIRRORING CON-  
FIRMATION” screen.  
MIRRORING CONFIRMATION  
• Recording and playback are not possible  
when performing mirroring setting.  
• The hard disk capacity displayed on the  
screen is calculated based on 1 GB = (1024)3  
Bytes.Therefore it is displayed as lower than  
the actual capacity.  
REV  
FWD  
ALL HDD DATA IS DELETED!!  
IT TAKES APPROX. 1HOUR  
START?  
EXECUTE  
[CANCEL]:CANCEL  
[EXEC]:START  
Caution  
• When mirroring is set, recordable space in  
the hard disk will reduce by half.  
Pay attention when setting the recording du-  
ration.  
• Mirroring can only be set for built-in hard  
disks. Mirroring at external hard disk drives  
are not possible.  
4. Press the [EXECUTE] button again  
• Setting takes approximately 1 hour,  
upon which mirroring setting will be  
BUILD-IN HDD 1 : NOW MIRRORING SETTING...  
BUILD-IN HDD 2 : NOW MIRRORING SETTING...  
MIRRORING SETING  
completed.  
• Upon completion, the “MIRRORING  
SETTING SUCCEEDED” screen will be  
displayed.  
MIRRORING SETTING TAKES APPROX. 1 HOUR  
------ NOW SETTING [97.2%] ------  
• There is no guarantee that data will not be  
damaged when mirroring is set.  
• Press [OPERATE] button to start.  
• When mirroring settings are activated,  
events recorded in the built-in as well as  
external hard disks will be deleted. Ensure  
to create a backup for important event  
records.  
EXECUTE  
BUILD-IN HDD 1 : MIRRORING SETTING SUCCEEDED  
BUILD-IN HDD 2 : MIRRORING SETTING SUCCEEDED  
MIRRORING SETING  
• When mirroring settings are activated, play-  
back speed may slow down or image and  
sound may be out of sync, depending on  
the record settings and operational state.  
This does not affect the recording opera-  
tion.  
HDD UPDATE IS COMPLETED  
PRESS [OPERATE] FOR OPERATION  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Useful Features (continued)  
Hard Disk Mirroring (continued)  
Undo Mirroring  
HDD  
FWD  
OPERATE  
SEARCH  
MENU  
REV  
LOCK  
1. Turn the jog dial to select “NO” during  
OUT  
EXECUTE  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
mirroring setting.  
SKIP  
MIRRORING  
BUILT-IN HDD 1 :  
BUILT-IN HDD 2 :  
76GB OK  
76GB OK  
REV  
FWD  
NO  
MIRRORING SETTING  
2.3.  
1.  
ALL HDD DATA WILL BE DELETED!!  
NOW MIRRORING  
SET [NO] TO CANCEL MIRRORING  
[EXEC]:CANCEL MIRROR  
2.  
Press the [EXECUTE] button  
• This displays the “MIRRORING CON-  
FIRMATION” screen.  
EXECUTE  
MIRRORING CONFIRMATION  
ALL HDD DATA IS DELETED!!  
START?  
Notes  
[CANCEL]:CANCEL  
[EXEC]:START  
• Recording and playback are not possible  
when undoing mirroring.  
• The hard disk capacity displayed on the  
screen is calculated based on 1 GB = (1024)3  
Bytes.Therefore it is displayed as lower than  
the actual capacity.  
3.  
Press the [EXECUTE]  
button again  
BUILD-IN HDD 1 : NOW CANCELING MIRRORING  
BUILD-IN HDD 2 : NOW CANCELING MIRRORING  
MIRRORING SETING  
Caution  
• Cancels the mirroring setting opera-  
tion and exits the Mirroring mode.  
• Upon completion, the “MIRRORING  
CANCELLATION SUCCEEDED”  
screen will be displayed.  
• When mirroring is undone, events recorded  
in the built-in as well as external hard disks  
will be deleted. Ensure to create a backup  
for important event records.  
• Press [OPERATE] button to start.  
BUILD-IN HDD 1 : MIRRORING CANCELLATION SUCCEEDED  
BUILD-IN HDD 2 : MIRRORING CANCELLATION SUCCEEDED  
EXECUTE  
MIRRORING SETING  
HDD UPDATE IS COMPLETED  
PRESS [OPERATE] FOR OPERATION  
To view the list of Power Outage Recovery Records  
Viewing of the list of date and time at which power failure is restored is possible.  
1.  
1.  
Press the [MENU] button  
MAINTENANCE  
1.TOTAL TIME  
2.POWER OUTAGE TIME LIST  
PL-1  
HDD  
FWD  
OPERATE  
22H  
10/07/2003 TH 10:47  
SEARCH  
MENU  
REV  
• Follow procedures in ‘Changing Menu  
Settings’ on page 22 to display the  
“DISK UTILITY/MAINTENANCEMenu  
and the “MAINTENANCE” screen.  
• This displays the “POWER OUTAGE  
TIME LIST”.  
:
PL-  
PL-  
PL-  
/
/
**********  
**********  
**********  
** ** **** ** ** **  
LOCK  
OUT  
:
/
/
** ** **** ** ** **  
:
/
/
** ** **** ** ** **  
EXECUTE  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
SKIP  
[CANCEL]:LIST CLEAR  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Series Recording Using 2 or More VR-716 Recorders  
Recording using 2 or more VR-716 recorders is possible. Once the first VR-716 is full, recording automatically starts at the second  
VR-716.  
<VR-716 1>  
AUDIO IN  
Connection  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
VIDEO IN  
THRU OUT  
SCSI  
CAUTION  
AUDIO OUT  
VIDEO OUT  
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK  
DO NOT OPEN  
LAN  
1
2
1
2
AV  
IS:RISQUE DE CHOC  
ELECTRIQ  
RS-232C  
UPS  
1
4/ 16  
12  
5
8
<Connection of the Signal Input/Output Terminals>  
• Connect the [SERIES REC OUT] terminal at the rear panel of the first VR-  
716 to the [SERIES REC IN] terminal of the second.  
• Connect the [CLOCK RESET OUT] terminal of the first VR-716 to the  
[CLOCK RESET IN] terminal of the second.  
AC IN  
(220V–240V  
)
SIGNAL GND  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
1
1
3
1
5
R
S
T
C
O
M
IN  
IN  
E
X
T
R
E
C
CLK SER  
WAR RST REC  
OUT OUT OUT  
10 12 14 16 OUT  
ALARM  
9
13 16  
EE OUT  
COM  
• Connect the [COM] terminal of the first VR-716 to the same terminal at the  
second.  
AUDIO IN  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
Camera 1  
VIDEO IN  
THRU OUT  
SCSI  
CAUTION  
AUDIO OUT  
VIDEO OUT  
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK  
DO NOT OPEN  
LAN  
1
2
1
2
AV  
IS:RISQUE DE CHOC  
ELECTRIQ  
RS-232C  
UPS  
1
4/ 16  
12  
5
8
AC IN  
(220V–240V  
)
SIGNAL GND  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
1
1
3
1
5
R
S
T
C
O
M
IN  
IN  
E
X
T
R
E
C
CLK SER  
WAR RST REC  
OUT OUT OUT  
10 12 14 16 OUT  
ALARM  
9
13 16  
EE OUT  
COM  
<Connection between the 2 VR-716 Recorders>  
<VR-716 2>  
• Connect the [THRU OUT] terminals 1 - 16 of the firstVR-716 to the [VIDEO  
IN] terminals 1 - 16 of the second VR-716 accordingly.  
Camera 16  
<Signal Input/Output Terminals>  
Setting  
• Specify the same settings for both recorders in the “REC MODE” Menu  
(Page 24).  
• In the “OPERATION” Menu, specify a value other than “NORMAL REC” for  
the “RECOVERY REC” item.  
• In the “OPERATION” Menu (Page 25) of the first VR-716, set “REPEAT  
REC” to “OFF”.  
• Set the “SERIES REC” item in the “EXT REC” Menu (Page 25) to “ON”  
for both recorders.  
[COM]  
EXT REC  
COM  
RST COM  
IN  
IN  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11 13 15  
10 12 14 16  
ALARM  
CLK SER  
RST REC  
OUT OUT  
OUT  
WAR  
OUT  
[CLOCK RESET OUT]  
[SERIES REC OUT]  
[SERIES REC IN]  
[CLOCK RESET IN]  
Notes  
• When the [CLOCK RESET OUT/IN] terminals are connected, the clock  
in the 2 or more VR-716 recorders will be synchronized twice a day at  
12:00 am and 12:00pm.  
Turn off the power of the equipment before connecting.  
• Recording at the second VR-716 can only be stopped by using the  
[STOP] button on it.  
[COM]  
EXT REC  
RST COM  
IN  
IN  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11 13 15  
10 12 14 16  
ALARM  
CLK SER  
RST REC  
OUT OUT  
OUT  
WAR  
COM  
OUT  
• Recording will not start upon input of signals when the [OPERATE]  
button is in the OFF mode.  
• Recording will not start when in the Program Timer Standby mode.  
• When the power of the first VR-716 is cut off, the second VR-716 starts  
recording automatically.  
Activation of Recording Via External Signals  
While in the Stop mode, recording starts when the [EXT REC IN] terminal at the rear panel receives input signals from external  
devices.  
[EXT REC IN]  
Setting  
1.  
Set the “EXT REC MODE” item in the “EXT REC”  
Menu to “TRIGGER” or “MANUAL.  
Notes  
EXT REC  
COM  
RST COM  
IN  
IN  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11 13 15  
CLK SER  
RST REC  
OUT OUT  
• When this is set to “MANUAL, recording is executed only while input  
signals are received.  
OUT  
10 12 14 16  
WAR  
OUT  
ALARM  
• When this is set to “TRIGGER”, recording will continue between the  
interval when input signals are received until after execution of the Stop  
operation. Recording can only be stopped by using the [STOP] button  
on VR-716. Recording cannot be stopped using an external device.  
• Recording will not start upon input of signals when the [OPERATE]  
button is in the OFF mode.  
• Recording will not start when in the Program Timer Standby mode.  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Useful Features (continued)  
External Hard Disk Drives  
VR-716 allows connection of up to 4 external hard disk drives in addition to the 2 built-in hard disks. Follow the procedure below to  
alter the connection setup of the hard disk. There are 3 ways of altering connection setup, namely “NEW”, “CHANGE” and “DIS-  
CONNECT”.  
<Rear Panel of VR-716>  
<SCSI Standards on Expansion >  
AUDIO IN  
Interface  
Ultra Wide SCSI  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
VIDEO IN  
THRU OUT  
SCSI  
CAUTION  
AUDIO OUT  
VIDEO OUT  
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK  
DO NOT OPEN  
LAN  
1
2
1
2
AVIS:RISQUE DE CHOC  
ELECTRIQ  
RS-232C  
UPS  
Connector  
Half Pitch D-sub  
68 Pin  
1
4/ 16  
12  
5
8
AC IN  
(220V–240V  
)
SIGNAL GND  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11 13 15 RST COM  
IN  
IN  
EXT REC  
CLK SER  
WAR RST REC  
OUT OUT OUT  
10 12 14 16 OUT  
ALARM  
9
13 16  
COM  
EE OUT  
Maximum Transfer Rate 20 MB/s  
When connecting to 4 external  
hard disk drives (connection up  
to 4 hard disk drives is possible)  
SCSI ID Use values between  
0 ~ 3 (4 and above  
cannot be used)  
Terminator  
Notes  
• Maximum transfer rate is not guaranteed.  
• Consult the outlet from which this equipment  
is purchased on the types of HDD and cable  
that can be connected.  
When connecting to multiple hard disk drives  
Set a separate SCSI ID No. for each hard disk and ensure that there  
are no duplicate values.  
Connect the last hard disk drive in the series to the terminator.  
(Refer to the instruction manual of the hard disk drive to be connected  
for procedure on setting the SCSI ID No. as well as termination.)  
<
Alteration of Connection Setup  
>
1.  
Turn OFF the power  
Turn off the power by following the procedure onTurning OFF the Power’  
in ‘Turning ON/OFF the Power’ on page 15.  
• “NEW”  
: Connect to a new hard disk  
drive.  
: Replace the hard disk drive  
currently connected with  
another hard disk.  
• “CHANGE”  
• External hard disk drive cannot be detected even if it is connected with  
the power turned off. Connect only after unplugging the power cord.  
• “DISCONNECT” : Disconnect the hard disk  
drive currently connected.  
Once a hard disk drive is  
disconnected, images re-  
corded on the hard disk  
cannot be viewed even  
when it is reconnected.  
2.  
Connect the external hard disk drive and turn ON  
the power  
Turn on the power of the external disk drive before doing so for  
VR-716.  
Notes  
• For the external hard disk and cable that  
can be connected, consult your nearest JVC  
dealer.  
• The external hard disk drive will not func-  
tion properly if its power is turned on after  
turning on VR-716.  
3.  
Turn ON the power of VR-716  
• Turn on the power by following the  
procedure onTurning ON the Powerin  
Turning ON/OFF the Power’ on page  
15.  
HDD RECONFIGURING  
EXTERNAL HDD 4: 115GB NEW  
Turn off the power of VR-716 before turn-  
ing off the power of external hard disk.  
• When turning off the power of the external  
hard disk in the OPERATE OFF status of  
this unit, disconnect this unit from the wall  
outlet together.  
• The “HDD RECONFIGURING” screen  
will be displayed.  
HDD CONFIGURATION CHANGED  
PUSH [EXEC] FOR ABOVE HDD APPLY  
PUSH [CANCEL] TO QUIT  
(ALL RECONFIGURING DATA IS DELETED!)  
Caution  
• Recording will not be performed properly  
and this unit will restart automatically if the  
power supply of external hard disk is turned  
off during recording.  
Do not turn off the power supply of external  
hard disk during operation.  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6.  
4. Press the [EXECUTE] button  
HDD  
FWD  
• This displays the “CONFIRM HDD  
OPERATE  
SEARCH  
MENU  
REV  
CONFIRM HDD RECONFIGURING  
RECONFIGURING” Screen.  
LOCK  
OUT  
EXECUTE  
EXECUTE  
ALL RECONFIGURED HDD DATA IS DELETED!  
START?  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
SKIP  
[CANCEL]:CANCEL  
[EXEC]:START  
4.5.  
5.  
Press the [EXECUTE] button again  
• This starts the formatting of the external hard disk drive.  
Notes  
• If the “HDD RECONFIGURING” screen is  
not displayed upon turning on the power  
again, this means the connection is faulty.  
Turn off the power of VR-716 and the exter-  
nal hard disk drives and check if the cables,  
terminator and power supply are properly  
connected.  
• Upon completion, the “FORMAT SUCCEEDED” screen will be dis-  
played.  
EXECUTE  
EXTERNAL HDD4 : NOW FORMATTING...  
• Press the [CANCEL] button when the HDD  
Reconfiguration screen is displayed to ter-  
minate the process. Upon terminating, turn  
off the power of VR-716.  
• Disconnection instead of formatting will be  
executed when “DISCONNECTis selected  
for the alteration of connection setup. The  
“NOW DISCONNECTING...z “DISCON-  
NECTING SUCCEEDED” messages will be  
displayed on the screen.  
EXTERNAL HDD 4 : FORMAT SUCCEEDED  
MIRRORING SETING  
• Formatting time required for each external  
hard disk drive (120 GB) is about 30 sec-  
onds.  
HDD UPDATE IS COMPLETED  
PRESS [OPERATE] FOR OPERATION  
• Recording and playback are not possible  
when altering connection setup.  
• The hard disk capacity displayed on the  
screen is calculated based on  
1 GB = (1024)3 Bytes. Therefore it is dis-  
played as lower than the actual capacity.  
6.  
Press the [OPERATE] button  
• The hard disk drives are now usable.  
Caution  
OPERATE  
• At the screen upon completion of “FOR-  
MAT”, never unplug the power cord.  
Hard Disk Recovery Feature  
This unit is incorporated with automatic recovery feature. When there is fail-  
ure on the hard disk, it will restart and recover automatically. Upon restart,  
recording will continue with the remaining hard disk after the hard disk which  
failure occurred had been automatically disconnected.Recording is disabled  
during restart. Error code [E-01] will be displayed on the front display after  
automatic restart.  
Note  
• The following operations are not possible  
when error [E-01] is displayed:  
• “TIME ZONE SETTING”  
• “DEFRAG DATABASE”  
• “FORMAT”  
To return to the normal display from error code display, turn [OPERATE] to  
off once and then turn [OPERATE] to on again.  
• “MIRRORING”  
• “DVD-RAM COPY”  
Automatic recovery is not possible in the case of severe failure where it can-  
not be rebooted.  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Useful Features (continued)  
Copying to DVD-RAM  
Copy of data stored in VR-716 to DVD-RAM is possible when a DVD-RAM drive is connected to it.  
<VR-716>  
Connection  
AUDIO IN  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
VIDEO IN  
Connect the DVD-RAM drive to the [SCSI] terminal on the rear panel of VR-  
716.  
THRU OUT  
SCSI  
CAUTION  
AUDIO OUT  
VIDEO OUT  
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK  
DO NOT OPEN  
LAN  
1
2
1
2
AVIS:RISQUE DE CHOC  
ELECTRIQ  
RS-232C  
UPS  
1
4/ 16  
12  
5
8
AC IN  
(220V–240V  
)
SIGNAL GND  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
1
1
3
1
5
R
S
T
C
O
M
IN  
IN  
EXT REC  
CLK SER  
WAR RST REC  
OUT OUT OUT  
10 12 14 16 OUT  
ALARM  
9
1
3
1
6
COM  
EE OUT  
DVD-RAM FORMAT  
• Before copying to the DVD-RAM, execute “6.DVD-RAM FORMAT” under  
“DISK UTILITY” in “DISK UTILITY/MAINTENANCE”.  
DVD-RAM  
• Execute DVD-RAM FORMAT using VR-716.  
• DVD-RAM will be formatted by FAT32.  
• It will return to “DISK UTILITY/MAINTENANCE” menu automatically af-  
ter the “DVD-RAM FORMAT” is completed.  
1.  
Caution  
HDD  
FWD  
OPERATE  
CANCEL  
SEARCH  
MENU  
REV  
• All the data in DVD-RAM will be deleted if “DVD-RAM FORMAT” is  
executed.  
TIMER  
LOCK  
OUT  
DISPLAY  
EXECUTE  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
SKIP  
Copying to DVD-RAM  
2.3.  
3.  
1. Press the [MENU] button  
• Follow procedures in ‘Changing Menu Settings’ on page 22 to display  
the “DISK UTILITY/MAINTENANCE” Menu and the “DISK UTILITY”  
screen.  
• Stop the recording if it is in operation.  
Notes  
MENU  
• When a DVD-RAM drive is not connected,  
the following items will not be displayed on  
the “DISK UTILITY” Menu:  
DISK UTILITY  
1.AUTO SCAN DISK  
2.MANUAL SCAN DISK  
3.DEFRAG DATABASE  
4.FORMAT  
ON  
OFF  
5.MIRRORING  
6.DVD-RAM FORMAT  
7.DVD-RAM COPY  
Item “6. DVD-RAM FORMAT”  
Item “7. DVD-RAM COPY”  
• 2 or more DVD-RAM drives cannot be con-  
nected.  
• Consult the outlet from which this equipment  
is purchased on the types of DVD-RAM  
drive and cable that can be connected.  
• The number of devices including external  
hard disk to be connected to SCSI terminal  
should be 4 or less.  
• When connecting external hard disk simul-  
taneously, connect the DVD-RAM drive to  
the nearest terminator.  
2.  
Select the “DVD-RAM  
COPY” item using [  
]
and press [  
]
• The “DVD-RAM COPY” screen will be  
displayed.  
DVD-RAM COPY  
D
M
Y
H
M
AL FIX  
28  
07 2003  
10 09  
OFF  
COPY D/M/Y H:M:S(START) D/M/Y H:M:S(END)  
CAMERA  
-
-
:
:
-
-
:
:
** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** **  
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
-
** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** **  
-
-
-
-
:
:
:
:
** ** **  
** ** **  
** ** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** **  
-
-
:
:
-
-
:
:
** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** **  
** ** ** **  
** ** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** **  
-
-
:
:
-
-
:
:
• Set the SCSI ID of the DVD-RAM drive to  
4.  
** ** **  
** ** **  
-
-
:
:
-
-
:
:
** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** **  
-
-
:
:
-
-
:
:
** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** **  
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
-
** ** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** **  
** ** **  
** ** **  
-
-
:
:
-
-
:
:
** ** **  
COPY START CAPA[ 4473 MB] RESV[ 0 MB]  
<= : RETURN  
[EXEC]:SAVE/CANCEL  
** ** **  
** ** **  
** ** ** ** ** ** **  
• The order of D/M/Y will change in accor-  
dance with the “DATE DISPLAY” setting in  
the “ONSCREEN MODE” menu.  
• Recording and playback on this unit are not  
possible during “DVD-RAM COPY”.  
• Network connection is not possible during  
“DVD-RAM COPY”.  
3.  
Turn the jog dial to select a  
“D” (Day) value  
• Use [ ] and the jog dial to set the starting day, month, year, hour,  
minute and second values of the data to copy.  
To display only alarm/sensor data, set “AL FIX” to “ON”.  
REV  
FWD  
Caution  
• Always leaves the power supply of DVD-  
RAM drive on. Malfunction will occur if  
power is turned off and when DVD-RAM is  
not inserted.  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.  
Press the [EXECUTE] button  
HDD  
FWD  
OPERATE  
CANCEL  
SEARCH  
MENU  
REV  
• The data list is displayed and cursor  
moves to the data closest to the speci-  
fied starting day, month, year, hour,  
minute and second.  
TIMER  
LOCK  
OUT  
DVD-RAM COPY  
D
M
Y
H
M
AL FIX  
OFF  
28  
07 2003  
10 10  
COPY D/M/Y H:M:S(START) D/M/Y H:M:S(END)  
CAMERA  
DISPLAY  
EXECUTE  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
28-07-03 06:30:16 28-07-03 06:30:16 13 14 15 16  
28-07-03 06:30:16 28-07-03 06:30:16  
28-07-03 28-07-03  
28-07-03 06:30:16 28-07-03 06:30:16  
1
5
9
06:30:16  
06:30:16  
SKIP  
28-07-03  
28-07-03  
06:30:14  
06:30:14 13 14 15 16  
• Alarm/sensor data is displayed in yellow.  
28-07-03 06:30:14 28-07-03 06:30:14  
1
5
9
28-07-03 06:30:14 28-07-03 06:30:14  
EXECUTE  
06:30:13  
** ** **  
06:30:13  
28-07-03  
28-07-03  
-
-
:
:
-
-
:
:
** ** **  
** ** **  
** ** **  
** ** ** **  
COPY START CAPA[ 4473 MB] RESV[ 0 MB]  
<= : RETURN  
[EXEC]:SAVE/CANCEL  
6.8. 4.5. 5.6.  
7.8.  
9.  
Notes  
5.  
Turn the jog dial to select the data to copy and press [EXECUTE]  
• This cannot be executed if the data volume  
to be copied exceeds the space available.  
• The data copied to the DVD-RAM may shift  
2 seconds forward or backward from the  
specified location.  
• The cursor moves to the Day under the “START” column of the specified data.  
• Press [CANCEL] to return to the screen after Step 4 is executed.  
• When copying as specified by the original “START” / “END” time, perform step  
7 after this operation.  
• Press the [SEARCH] button upon comple-  
tion of DVD-RAM Copy.A file list containing  
the copied data on the DVD-RAM will be  
displayed.  
REV  
FWD  
DVD-RAM COPY  
EXECUTE  
D
M
Y
H
M
AL FIX  
OFF  
28  
07 2003  
10 10  
COPY D/M/Y H:M:S(START) D/M/Y H:M:S(END)  
CAMERA  
28-07-03 06:30:16 28-07-03 06:30:16 13 14 15 16  
28-07-03 06:30:16 28-07-03 06:30:16  
28-07-03 28-07-03  
28-07-03 06:30:16 28-07-03 06:30:16  
1
5
9
06:30:16  
06:30:16  
28-07-03  
28-07-03  
06:30:14  
06:30:14 13 14 15 16  
• The image data copied previously is also  
displayed in the list.  
28-07-03 06:30:14 28-07-03 06:30:14  
1
5
9
28-07-03 06:30:14 28-07-03 06:30:14  
06:30:13  
** ** **  
06:30:13  
28-07-03  
28-07-03  
-
-
:
:
-
-
:
:
** ** **  
** ** **  
** ** **  
** ** ** **  
COPY START CAPA[ 4473 MB] RESV[ 0 MB]  
<= : RETURN  
[EXEC]:SAVE/CANCEL  
• If the copied image data is the same as  
the previously copied data, it will be  
stored and displayed in the list sepa-  
rately with different names on the DVD-  
RAM.  
• The items of the list remain even if the  
image data is deleted via computer or  
others.  
6.  
Turn the jog dial to select the copy range  
• Use [ ] and the jog dial to set the starting/ending time of DVD-Ram Copy.  
• Press [CANCEL] to return to the screen after Step 4 is executed.  
• The line will be displayed in green after the original “START” / “END” time has  
been changed.  
REV  
FWD  
• When copying data which has been se-  
lected for copy (indicated by the [ _ ] mark)  
in Step 5, the [ _ ] mark will disappear and  
returns to the screen for setting the start-  
ing/ending time.Set the date/time again and  
execute.  
• For the file name of image data, refer to the  
instruction manual ofVR-716 PLAYER (Ex-  
ecute backup).  
7.  
Press the [EXECUTE] button  
• This displays the [ _ ] mark and the entire  
line is highlighted.  
EXECUTE  
DVD-RAM COPY  
D
M
Y
H
M
AL FIX  
OFF  
28  
07 2003  
10 10  
COPY D/M/Y H:M:S(START) D/M/Y H:M:S(END)  
CAMERA  
28-07-03 06:30:16 28-07-03 06:30:16 13 14 15 16  
28-07-03 06:30:16 28-07-03 06:30:16  
28-07-03 28-07-03  
28-07-03 06:30:16 28-07-03 06:30:16  
1
5
9
06:30:16  
06:30:16  
28-07-03  
28-07-03  
06:30:14  
06:30:14 13 14 15 16  
28-07-03 06:30:14 28-07-03 06:30:14  
1
5
9
28-07-03 06:30:14 28-07-03 06:30:14  
• Do not change the file name. The correct  
information may not be displayed during  
playback.  
06:30:13  
** ** **  
06:30:13  
28-07-03  
28-07-03  
-
-
:
:
-
-
:
:
** ** **  
** ** **  
** ** **  
** ** ** **  
COPY START CAPA[ 4473 MB] RESV[ 0 MB]  
<= : RETURN  
[EXEC]:SAVE/CANCEL  
• Repeat Steps 5 ~ 7 to continue marking data  
to be copied with the [ _ ] mark displayed.  
Caution  
8.  
Select “COPY START” using  
DVD-RAM COPY CONFIRMATION  
• At the screen upon completion of “DVD-  
RAM COPY, never unplug the power cord.  
• Refer to the notes related to SummerTime.  
(Page 116)  
[
] and press [EXECUTE]  
• The “DVD-RAM COPY CONFIRMATION”  
START COPY TO DVD-RAM  
START?  
screen will be displayed.  
EXECUTE  
[CANCEL]:CANCEL  
[EXEC]:START  
Take note of the following when setting the  
starting/ending time of DVD-RAM Copy:  
• Set a starting/ending time that is within  
the time range of the master data.  
• The starting time set shall precede the  
ending time.  
DVD-RAM COPY  
9.  
Press the [EXECUTE] button again  
• The unit enters “DVD-RAM COPY” mode,  
and starts copying.  
• Dates that do not correspond to the cal-  
endar cannot be specified.  
COPY HAS BEEN COMPLETED  
• File with “FRAME RATEless than 25 cop-  
ied to DVD-RAM may not be able to play-  
back with generic software on PC. Play-  
back using the same method as viewing  
the backup file on the PC installed with  
bundled application [VR-716 Player].  
• Press [CANCEL] during Copy to cancel the  
operation.  
• Upon completion, the “COPY HAS BEEN  
[SEARCH]: SEE LIST ON DVD-RAM  
[OPERATE]: REMOVE DVD-RAM TO END  
COMPLETEDmessage will be displayed.  
EXECUTE  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Useful Features (continued)  
Activation of Recording Via External Alarm/Sensor Signals  
When signals from alarm devices are input via the [ALARM IN] terminal on the rear panel, recording will automatically start in the  
mode as specified for the “REC MODE” item in the “ALARM/SENSOR MODE” Menu (Page 27). Alarm recording will be executed  
if alarm signals are received when VR-716 is in the Recording mode. Sensor recording will be executed when in the Stop mode. In  
other words, naming varies according to the mode of VR-716.  
<Example>  
Set the record mode for Cameras 1 - 4 and  
Cameras 9 - 12.  
1. Connect the alarm device to theSignal Input/  
Output terminal’ on the rear panel of the equip-  
Before doing so, ensure that setting for  
Cameras 1 - 4 and Cameras 9 - 12 in the  
“REC MODE” Menu is completed.  
Page 36Recording in the Normal Mode’  
ment  
• Connect the alarm device to the [ALARM IN 1 ~ ALARM IN 4] and  
[ALARM IN 9 ~ ALARM IN 12] terminals.  
2.  
Press the [MENU] button  
• Follow procedures in ‘Changing Menu Settings’ on page 22 to display  
the “ALARM/SENSOR MODE” Menu.  
MENU  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
CAUTION  
ALARM/SENSOR MODE  
1.BLOCK  
2.REC MODE  
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK  
DO NOT OPEN  
1
ALARM  
25 IPS  
H
180SEC  
ON  
OFF  
10SEC  
OFF  
OFF  
S:RISQUE DE CHOC  
ELECTRIQ  
1
4/ 16  
5
8
3.FRAME RATE  
4.QUALITY  
EXT REC  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11 13 15 RST COM  
IN  
IN  
CLK SER  
WAR RST REC  
OUT OUT OUT  
5.DURATION  
6.AUDIO REC  
7.PRESENSOR REC  
8.PRESENSOR REC DURATION  
9.EXT INPUT OPERATING MODE  
10.MOTION DETECT  
11.MOTION DETECT SETTING  
10 12 14 16 OUT  
ALARM  
9
12  
13 16  
EE OUT  
COM  
3.  
Press [  
“BLOCK” item  
] to select the  
1.  
• Move the cursor to select.  
2.  
HDD  
FWD  
OPERATE  
SEARCH  
MENU  
REV  
LOCK  
OUT  
4.  
Turn the jog dial to select “1”  
• Setting can now be performed for  
Camera 1 ~ Camera 4.  
EXECUTE  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
ALARM/SENSOR MODE  
1.BLOCK  
2.REC MODE  
3.FRAME RATE  
4.QUALITY  
SKIP  
1
ALARM  
25 IPS  
H
REV  
FWD  
5.DURATION  
180SEC  
ON  
6.AUDIO REC  
3.5.  
4.5.  
7.PRESENSOR REC  
8.PRESENSOR REC DURATION  
9.EXT INPUT OPERATING MODE  
10.MOTION DETECT  
11.MOTION DETECT SETTING  
OFF  
10SEC  
OFF  
OFF  
<Types of Record Modes>  
• “ALARM” :  
Starts alarm recording only when VR-716  
is in the Recording mode.  
• “SENSOR”:  
5.  
Press [  
MODE” to set a value  
] and turn the jog dial to select “REC  
Starts sensor recording only when VR-716  
is in the Stop mode.  
REV  
FWD  
• “ALARM/SENSOR” :  
Starts alarm recording when VR-716 is in  
the Recording mode and sensor recording  
when in the Stop mode.  
For selecting a record mode.  
For selecting the frame rate during recording.  
ALARM/SENSOR MODE  
1.BLOCK  
1
2.REC MODE  
3.FRAME RATE  
4.QUALITY  
ALARM  
25 IPS  
H
Notes  
For selecting the picture quality during  
recording.  
5.DURATION  
180SEC  
ON  
6.AUDIO REC  
• Ensure that the “EXT INPUT OPERATING  
MODE” (page 28) item is set to “ON”. If  
this is set to “OFF”, recording via alarm sig-  
nals is not possible even when setting is  
completed.  
7.PRESENSOR REC  
8.PRESENSOR REC DURATION  
9.EXT INPUT OPERATING MODE  
10.MOTION DETECT  
11.MOTION DETECT SETTING  
OFF  
10SEC  
OFF  
OFF  
For selecting the duration of recording.  
For selecting whether to execute audio  
recording during recording.  
• About 1 second or less will be required be-  
fore sensor recording starts upon the input  
of alarm signals. To resolve this, make use  
of the ‘Presensor Recording’ feature.  
(Page 113)  
For selecting the duration of presensor  
recording. Page 113 ‘Presensor Recording’  
For selecting whether to activate presensor  
recording.  
For setting the operation of the record mode.  
Page 28 ‘ALARM/SENSOR MODE Menu’  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.  
6. Press [  
/
] to move the cursor to the  
“BLOCK” item  
HDD  
FWD  
OPERATE  
SEARCH  
MENU  
REV  
ALARM/SENSOR MODE  
1.BLOCK  
2.REC MODE  
3.FRAME RATE  
4.QUALITY  
3
ALARM  
25 IPS  
H
LOCK  
OUT  
EXECUTE  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
5.DURATION  
180SEC  
ON  
6.AUDIO REC  
SKIP  
7.PRESENSOR REC  
8.PRESENSOR REC DURATION  
9.EXT INPUT OPERATING MODE  
10.MOTION DETECT  
11.MOTION DETECT SETTING  
OFF  
10SEC  
OFF  
OFF  
7.  
Turn the jog dial to select  
“3”  
6.8.  
7.8.  
• Setting can now be performed for Camera 9 ~ Camera 12.  
REV  
FWD  
8.  
9.  
Repeat procedure in Step 5 to select the “REC  
MODE” item and set a value accordingly  
Notes  
Press [MENU] to end menu setting  
• The display returns to the normal screen.  
• The [AL REC] or [SENSOR REC] indicator on the front display will  
appear.  
• In the case when “REC MODE” is set to  
“ALARM”, press the [REC] button after  
menu setting is completed. Alarm record-  
ing will be executed in the specified mode  
when alarm input is received.  
Front Display  
MENU  
• In the case when “REC MODE” is set to  
“SENSOR”, press the [STOP] button after  
menu setting is completed. Sensor record-  
ing will be executed in the specified mode  
when alarm input is received.  
• Press the [CANCEL] button to stop the  
buzzer sound during alarm or sensor re-  
cording. Press the [CANCEL] button again  
during alarm recording to return to the nor-  
mal recording mode or during sensor re-  
cording to stop the operation.  
• Press the [CANCEL] button once again and  
the Alarm/Sensor [AL] indicator on the front  
display will stop blinking.  
Notification During Alarm Recording or Sensor  
Recording  
[AL] indicator on the front display will  
FDP/BUZZER  
[ FDP ]  
1.ALARM/SENSOR MODE  
2.ALARM/SENSOR BLINK  
3.SEQUENTIAL MONITOR  
4.INPUT SIGNAL ERROR  
5.WARNING  
[BUZZER]  
1.HDD FULL  
2.ALARM/SENSOR  
3.WARNING  
appear during alarm or sensor recording  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
when this is set to “ON”.  
[AL] indicator on the front display will blink  
after alarm or sensor recording has ended  
when this is set to “ON”.  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
Front Display  
[CANCEL]  
Buzzer will sound when this is set to “ON”.  
CANCEL  
SEARCH  
5
7
6
8
TIMER  
MONITOR DISPLAY  
1.EE OUT 1-4/-16  
2.SINGLE PICTURE MODE  
3.QUAD PICTURE MODE  
BLOCK 1  
13  
15  
14  
DISPLAY  
1-16  
SEQUENCE  
MULTI  
REC  
STOP  
PLAY  
STILL  
16  
1SEC  
1SEC  
1SEC  
1SEC  
OFF  
BLOCK 2  
BLOCK 3  
BLOCK 4  
For setting the switching mode of the  
monitor screen when alarm signals are  
received. Page 26 ‘MONITOR DISPLAY  
Menu’  
4.ALARM/SENSOR SWITCH  
5.SPLIT SCREEN BORDER COLOR BORDER3  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Useful Features (continued)  
Using the Motion Detect Feature  
VR-716 comes equipped with a Motion Detect feature, whereby the monitor screen is divided into 150 areas and alarm/sensor  
recording is automatically executed upon detection of image motion within these areas.  
1. Press the [MENU] button  
• Follow procedures in ‘Changing Menu Settings’ on page 22 to display  
1.  
the “ALARM/SENSOR MODE” Menu.  
MENU  
HDD  
OPERATE  
SEARCH  
MENU  
ALARM/SENSOR MODE  
1.BLOCK  
REV  
FWD  
1
ALARM  
25 IPS  
H
180SEC  
ON  
OFF  
10SEC  
OFF  
OFF  
2.REC MODE  
3.FRAME RATE  
4.QUALITY  
5.DURATION  
6.AUDIO REC  
7.PRESENSOR REC  
8.PRESENSOR REC DURATION  
9.EXT INPUT OPERATING MODE  
10.MOTION DETECT  
11.MOTION DETECT SETTING  
LOCK  
OUT  
EXECUTE  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
2.  
3.  
Turn the jog dial to select a  
block  
SKIP  
REV  
FWD  
3.4.  
2.3.5.  
Press [  
each item  
] and turn the jog dial to set a value for  
REV  
FWD  
For selecting a record mode.  
For selecting the frame rate during  
recording.  
For selecting the picture quality during  
recording.  
For selecting the duration of recording.  
ALARM/SENSOR MODE  
1.BLOCK  
2.REC MODE  
3.FRAME RATE  
4.QUALITY  
1
ALARM  
25 IPS  
H
For selecting whether to execute audio  
recording during recording.  
5.DURATION  
180SEC  
ON  
6.AUDIO REC  
For selecting whether to activate  
presensor recording. Page 113  
‘Presensor Recording’  
7.PRESENSOR REC  
8.PRESENSOR REC DURATION  
9.EXT INPUT OPERATING MODE  
10.MOTION DETECT  
11.MOTION DETECT SETTING  
OFF  
10SEC  
OFF  
OFF  
Caution  
• When cameras are connected, flickering  
fluorescent lights may give rise to false de-  
tection. In this case, set the camera to  
flickerless. (Instruction manual of cam-  
era used)  
For selecting the duration of presensor  
recording.  
For setting the operation of Motion Detect.  
Page 28 ‘ALARM/SENSOR MODE  
Menu’  
• Ensure that an item other than “OFF” is se-  
lected for the “MOTION DETECT” item  
(page 28).  
Motion Detect will not activate yet after set-  
ting is completed.  
4.  
Select the “MOTION DETECT SETTING” item us-  
ing [ ] and press [  
]
• The Motion Detect feature is not designed  
to prevent thefts or fire disasters.We do not  
bear responsibility for any loss incurred due  
to accidents or damages.  
MOTION DETECT SETTING  
1.BLOCK  
2.CAMERA 1 SCENE  
AREA SETTING  
3.CAMERA 2 SCENE  
AREA SETTING  
4.CAMERA 3 SCENE  
AREA SETTING  
1
MANUAL  
MANUAL  
MANUAL  
MANUAL  
• This displays the “MOTION DETECT  
SETTING” Menu screen.  
5.CAMERA 4 SCENE  
AREA SETTING  
5.  
Turn the jog dial to select  
“BLOCK” • Set “BLOCK” to “1”:  
Sets detection of motion at Camera 1 ~ Camera 4.  
• Set “BLOCK” to “2”:  
REV  
FWD  
Sets detection of motion at Camera 5 ~ Camera 8.  
• Set “BLOCK” to “3”:  
Sets detection of motion at Camera 9 ~ Camera 12.  
• Set “BLOCK” to “4”:  
Sets detection of motion at Camera 13 ~ Camera 16.  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11.  
6. Press [  
] to move the cursor to “SCENE”  
• Move the cursor to the camera for which  
HDD  
FWD  
OPERATE  
SEARCH  
MENU  
motion is to be detected.  
REV  
MOTION DETECT SETTING  
1.BLOCK  
2.CAMERA 1 SCENE  
AREA SETTING  
3.CAMERA 2 SCENE  
AREA SETTING  
4.CAMERA 3 SCENE  
AREA SETTING  
1
LOCK  
OUT  
MANUAL  
MANUAL  
MANUAL  
MANUAL  
EXECUTE  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
SKIP  
5.CAMERA 4 SCENE  
AREA SETTING  
7.  
Turn the jog dial to select a  
value  
6.8.9.10.  
7.  
• Select a value from the Settings column under “SCENE” on page 28.  
• When “MANUALis selected, “DETECTING SENSITIVITY”, “TERMI-  
NATION SENSITIVITY” and “OBJECT SIZE LEVELcan be further  
specified under “DETAIL SETTING”.  
REV  
FWD  
8.  
9.  
Press [  
cursor to “AREA SET-  
TING”  
] to move the  
MOTION DETECT SETTING  
1.BLOCK  
2.CAMERA 1 SCENE  
AREA SETTING  
3.CAMERA 2 SCENE  
AREA SETTING  
4.CAMERA 3 SCENE  
AREA SETTING  
1
MANUAL  
MANUAL  
MANUAL  
MANUAL  
<
How to set manually>  
To determine the value for “DETECTING  
SENSITIVITY”, “TERMINATION SENSITIV-  
ITY” and “OBJECT SIZE LEVEL, when se-  
lecting the “SCENE” value other than  
“STANDARD”, please refer to the detailed  
setting displayed. (Page 70 ‘Setting’)  
5.CAMERA 4 SCENE  
AREA SETTING  
Press the [  
• Select the area for which motion is to be detected.  
] button  
Notes  
Use [  
/
/
/
] to select the areas and press  
To alter the “REC MODEMenu settings be-  
fore setting at theAREA SETTINGscreen,  
close the setting screen and open the  
“AREA SETTING” screen again after alter-  
ation is completed. There are cases where  
live images are not displayed at the back-  
ground of the “AREA SETTING” screen.  
• The monitor screen is divided into 150 ar-  
eas for detecting motion. To set all 150 ar-  
eas, press and hold [EXECUTE].  
[EXECUTE]. Areas that are selected will be displayed in  
a different color on the monitor screen.To undo the  
selection, press [CANCEL].  
The position can be moved diagonally by pressing  
buttons simultaneously.  
The position can be moved continuously by pressing  
and holding the buttons.  
• Press and hold [SEARCH] when the “AREA SETTING” screen is dis-  
played to switch to Motion DetectTest mode.(Page 70Check mode’)  
To exit the Test mode, press [SEARCH] again.  
To clear all 150 areas, press and hold [CAN-  
CEL].  
• Record mode of Motion Detect (picture  
quality, frame rate, etc.) is identical to the  
Alarm Mode settings.  
10.Select the areas in the leftmost column and press [  
]
to return to theMOTION DETECT SETTINGMenu screen  
Page 66Activation of RecordingVia Ex-  
ternal Alarm Signals’  
• After camera setting is completed, capture  
an actual image to double-check if alarm is  
properly triggered via Motion Detect as well  
as its detection sensitivity.  
Press [  
] to return to the “MOTION DETECT  
SETTING” screen when areas selected are in the  
leftmost column.  
Repeat Steps 3 ~ 10 to specify settings for other cameras.  
11.Press [MENU] to end setting  
• The display returns to the normal screen.  
MENU  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Useful Features (continued)  
Motion detect check mode and setting guidance  
Check mode  
Screen image  
Press and hold [SEARCH] button when the “AREA SETTINGscreen  
is displayed to open the check mode screen.  
ALARM mark  
(Red: Alarm is ongoing)  
Detection area boundary (Blue)  
Explanation of the screen content  
• ALARM mark:  
A red [a] will be displayed on the upper left of the screen when  
ALARM detection is ongoing.  
• Detection area boundary (Blue):  
Boundary of the setting unit area in the “AREA SETTING” screen.  
• Frame of the specified area for detection:  
The area as specified in the “AREA SETTING” will be displayed as  
a white frame.  
Frame of the specified area for  
detection (White)  
Detection point (White, Green)  
Object  
• Detection point (White):  
Graph of sum total for detection  
point (Yellow)  
The point where motion has reached the “DETECTING SENSITIV-  
ITY” will be displayed as a white dot. ALARM detection will be acti-  
vated if the number of white dot hits the number of “OBJECT SIZE  
LEVEL.  
• Detection point (Green):  
The point where motion has reached between the “DETECTING  
SENSITIVITYand “TERMINATION SENSITIVITYwill be displayed  
as a green dot.  
• Graph of sum total for detection point (Yellow):  
The changes in the display number of white dot will be displayed  
with the x-axis as the elapsed time.  
Setting  
Table 1: Setting value for different scene  
Detailed setting  
Setting value for different scene  
For setting to other than “STAN-  
DARD”, refer to the setting value from  
the arrow on the right side of “SCENE”  
in the menu.  
Alarm operation  
Minimum number of detection  
point *1  
“SCENE”  
“OBJECT  
SIZE  
LEVEL”  
“TERMINATION  
SENSITIVITY”  
“DETECTING  
SENSITIVITY”  
How to check setting value and  
alarm  
“STANDARD”  
“DOORWAY H”  
“DOORWAY L”  
PASSAGE H”  
PASSAGE L”  
“REGISTER H”  
“REGISTER L”  
ATM H”  
+1  
+4  
+0  
+3  
+2  
+2  
+3  
+5  
+4  
+8  
+0  
+4  
+0  
+4  
+0  
+0  
+4  
+5  
2
3
2
3
1
3
1
8
2
3
1
5
1
6
2
4
2
4
2
2
10  
7
Perform “SCENE” and “AREA SET-  
TING”, make sure that the ALARM  
mark is displayed when there is a  
motion to be detected as in check  
mode.Change the scene or widen the  
detection area if the ALARM mark is  
not displayed.  
4
2
9
4
8
1
10  
10  
10  
8
4
1
20 *2  
ATM L”  
Manual setting  
“LOBBY H”  
2
10  
7
When the selected “STANDARD” or  
other scenes cannot be detected,  
change the 3 parameters in the  
manual setting by referring to ‘Table  
1:Setting value for different sceneand  
Table 2: “OBJECT SIZE LEVELand  
“Alarm operation Minimum number of  
detection point”’.  
“LOBBY L”  
4
“GATE H”  
1
14  
10  
14  
10  
15  
12  
8
“GATE L”  
8
PARKING LOT H”  
PARKING LOT L”  
“LOW LUX H”  
“LOW LUX L”  
“ELEVATOR”  
“COUNTER”  
1
10 *2  
2
6
2
6
6
*1 Number of white dot displayed in check mode  
*2 The maximum number of point to be detected within one area is 9. Set the number of area  
such that the sum total of detection point exceeds the minimum number of detection point.  
Table 2: “OBJECT SIZE LEVELand “Alarm operation Minimum number of detection point”  
“OBJECT SIZE LEVEL”  
1
1
2
2
3
4
4
6
5
8
6
7
8
9
10  
Alarm operation Minimum  
number of detection point  
10  
15  
20  
25 30  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Continuing with Recording Upon Recovery from Power Failure  
VR-716 is equipped with a Recovery Recording feature that starts recording automatically upon recovery from a power failure.With  
this feature, restoration procedure will not be required when a power failure occurs during recording.  
1.4.  
1. Press the [MENU] button  
• Follow procedures in ‘Changing Menu Settings’ on page 22 to display  
HDD  
OPERATE  
SEARCH  
MENU  
REV  
FWD  
the “OPERATION/EXT REC” Menu.  
LOCK  
OUT  
MENU  
OPERATION/EXT REC  
[ OPERATION ]  
EXECUTE  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
1.RECOVERY REC  
2.REPEAT REC  
3.LANGUAGE SELECTION  
4.WATER MARK  
OFF  
OFF  
ENGLISH  
OFF  
SKIP  
5.OPERATION LOCK  
[EXT REC]  
1.EXT REC MODE  
2.SERIES REC  
ALL  
OFF  
OFF  
2.  
Press [  
“RECOVERY REC” item  
] to select the  
2.  
3.  
• Move the cursor to select.  
3.  
Turn the jog dial to select an operating mode  
• “PRIOR STATE”:  
When a power failure occurs during  
recording, recording will start again  
upon restoration.If power failure occurs  
when the equipment is in the Sensor  
Record mode (page 66), however,  
recording will not start automatically  
upon restoration.  
OPERATION/EXT REC  
[ OPERATION ]  
1.RECOVERY REC  
2.REPEAT REC  
3.LANGUAGE SELECTION  
4.WATER MARK  
5.OPERATION LOCK  
[EXT REC]  
NORMAL REC  
OFF  
ENGLISH  
OFF  
ALL  
1.EXT REC MODE  
2.SERIES REC  
OFF  
OFF  
• “NORMAL REC”:  
Recording resumes upon recovery from a power failure, regardless of  
the mode prior to the failure.  
Note  
• The “POWER OUTAGE LOG IS UPDATED”  
message will be displayed on the monitor  
only when the “WARNING” item in the  
“ONSCREEN MODE” Menu (page 23)  
is set to “ON”. Press the [CANCEL] button  
to clear the message display.  
4.  
Press [MENU] to end setting  
• The display returns to the normal screen.  
MENU  
Caution  
Notification of Power Outage  
• Hard Disk Checking is performed upon re-  
covery from a power failure, which may take  
a while before recording starts. It may take  
a long time when the data is fragmented or  
when there is a large amount of recorded  
data.  
• A list containing the date and time at which  
power failure is restored can be viewed.  
(Page 60)  
• The following message will be displayed on the monitor screen when  
a power outage occurs, and the [other E-04] message will appear on  
the front display.  
01-03-2003 SA 12:34:56  
100%  
AL-0  
POWER OUTAGE LOG IS UPDATED  
• When the Program Timer is set, recording  
will resume in the same mode after restor-  
ing from a power failure.  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Useful Features (continued)  
Setting a Title for Each Camera Channel Screen  
<Example>  
Register the title for Camera 1 as [EN-  
TRANCE1].  
1. Press the [MENU] button  
• Follow procedures in ‘Changing Menu Settings’ on page 22 to display  
the “CAMERA TITLE” Menu.  
MENU  
CAMERA TITLE  
1.BLOCK  
2.CAMERA 1  
3.CAMERA 2  
4.CAMERA 3  
5.CAMERA 4  
1
TITLE  
TITLE  
TITLE  
TITLE  
(NONE)  
(NONE)  
(NONE)  
(NONE)  
1.6.  
2.  
Press [  
“BLOCK” item  
] to select the  
HDD  
FWD  
OPERATE  
SEARCH  
MENU  
REV  
<= :RETURN  
LOCK  
OUT  
• Move the cursor to select.  
EXECUTE  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
SKIP  
2.4.5.  
3.5.  
3.  
4.  
Turn the jog dial to set “BLOCK” to “1”  
CAMERA TITLE  
1.BLOCK  
2.CAMERA 1  
3.CAMERA 2  
4.CAMERA 3  
5.CAMERA 4  
1
TITLE  
TITLE  
TITLE  
TITLE  
(NONE)  
(NONE)  
(NONE)  
(NONE)  
REV  
FWD  
<= :RETURN  
Press [  
] to select theCAMERA 1TITLEitem  
• Move the cursor to select.  
CAMERA TITLE  
1.BLOCK  
2.CAMERA 1  
3.CAMERA 2  
4.CAMERA 3  
5.CAMERA 4  
1
TITLE  
TITLE  
TITLE  
TITLE  
(NONE)  
(NONE)  
(NONE)  
(NONE)  
INPUT SELECT([JOG])  
<= :RETURN  
=
>
?
@
A
B
C
D
E
[CANCEL]:DELETE  
[SKIP]:CATEGORY  
<Characters that can be used in camera titles>  
5.  
Turn the jog dial to select a character  
• Upon moving the cursor to [E], press [ ] to move the cursor forward  
and continue to select [N], [T], [R], [A], [N], [C], [E] and [1] accordingly.  
(Excludes the case when title is set using a  
computer.)  
REV  
FWD  
CAMERA TITLE  
1.BLOCK  
2.CAMERA 1  
3.CAMERA 2  
4.CAMERA 3  
5.CAMERA 4  
1
TITLE  
TITLE  
TITLE  
TITLE  
ENTRANCE  
(NONE)  
(NONE)  
(NONE)  
INPUT SELECT([JOG])  
<= :RETURN  
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
Up to 15 characters can be used when reg-  
istering the camera title.  
[CANCEL]:DELETE  
[SKIP]:CATEGORY  
Repeat Steps 2 ~ 5 to register titles for other cameras.  
Note  
To clear a registered character, use [  
to select the character and press [CANCEL].  
/
]
6.  
Press [MENU] to end setting  
• The display returns to the normal screen.  
MENU  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to a PC – What is a Web Browser? –  
You can do the followings  
By connecting to a PC via a LAN cable, images recorded on VR-716 can be viewed on the PC monitor.  
LAN  
Hub  
[LAN] Terminal  
100BASE-T  
Straight LAN Cable  
Use Enhanced Category 5 or Category 6 cables to connect to PCs  
or hubs.  
Use a crossover cable for direct connection to PC, and a straight  
cable when connecting via a hub.  
HDD  
FWD  
OPERATE  
CANCEL  
SEARCH  
MENU  
1
3
2
4
ALARM  
5
7
6
REV  
SENSOR  
ALARM  
8
TIMER  
LOCK  
OUT  
SENSOR  
9
10  
1
ALARM  
13  
15  
14  
16  
SENSOR  
DISPLAY  
EXECUTE  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
SEQUENCE  
MULTI  
REC  
STOP  
PLAY  
STILL  
11  
ALARM  
SKIP  
SENSOR  
Bundled Application  
[VR-716 Player]  
Operate VR-716 using a PC (Installation of the  
bundled application [VR-716 Player] required.)  
• Search/Playback of recorded image on VR-716  
• Backup of recorded image on VR-716 in PCs  
• Capturing recorded image onVR-716 as still im-  
ages  
Refer to the [VR-716 Player] User’s Manual in the  
bundled CD-ROM for procedure on setup and  
operation of the [VR-716 Player] application.  
(The VR-716 Player application cannot be used  
to execute Record/Stop operations on VR-716.)  
Perform setting ofVR-716 with ease using a general-purpose browser  
(Internet Explorer)  
• Input of camera titles using keyboard  
• Record program using the Program Timer  
• Event search of alarm/sensor records  
• Security settings for files containing images recorded in VR-  
716  
• Playback of recorded images using a simple viewer  
(Playback with simple viewer is not possible without installing the  
bundled application [VR-716 Player])  
• Backup of menu settings  
Note  
• The PC specifications above are merely recommended example for using the application software with ease and is not a  
guarantee against its operation.  
Even when the PC fulfils the necessary operating conditions, its performance may vary across individual users depending  
how the PC is used.  
Caution  
• Simultaneous playback of images from a single VR-716 on multiple PCs is not possible.  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to a PC – What is a Web Browser? – (continued)  
Cautions for Proper Use of the Web Browser  
Minimum PC Specifications Required  
Note  
• OS  
: Windows 2000 Professional SP4 / Windows XP Pro-  
fessional SP1 / Windows XP Home Edition SP1  
: Pentium III 800MHz and above  
• The PC specifications are merely recom-  
mended example for using the application  
software with ease and is not a guarantee  
against its operation. Even when the PC  
fulfils the necessary operating conditions,  
its performance may vary across individual  
users depending how the PC is used.  
• CPU  
• Memory : 256 MB and above  
• Hard Disk : At least 50 MB of free space is required to install the  
bundled application software.  
• Monitor  
: XGA (1024 x 768 pixels) and above required  
SXGA (1280 x 1024 pixels) recommended  
Supports Internet Explorer Ver. 5.5 (SP2) / Ver. 6.0.  
In addition, Internet Explorer 5.0 is not supported.  
Other Cautions  
• Assuming that the Web browser is used in an Intranet environment in this  
case, disable the proxy server by selecting the “Internet Options” A  
“Connection” from the Internet Explorer.  
• Priority will be given to operation at the main unit of VR-716 when it is in  
the Recording, Timer Standby or Operating modes. Operation using a  
Web browser or simple viewer will be restricted in this case.  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup Flow  
Connecting Using a LAN Cable  
Page 76  
Page 77  
Notes  
What is IP address?  
Page 110  
What is subnet mask?  
Page 110  
Setting Up a Network for VR-716  
What is default gateway?  
Page 110  
• Set the “IP ADDRESS”.  
• Set the “NETMASK”.  
• Set the “DEFAULT GATEWAY”.  
Page 78  
Setting Up a PC Network  
WindowsXP Page 78  
Windows2000 Page 79  
• Set the “IP address”.  
• Set the “Subnet mask”.  
Connecting (Login) to the Network  
Page 81  
What is Login?  
Page 110  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to a PC – Connecting to a Web Browser and Setting Up –  
Connecting Using a LAN Cable  
Connecting to a (LAN) Network  
Notes  
What is LAN?  
Page 110  
LAN  
Hub  
Use Enhanced Category 5 or Category 6  
cables to connect to PCs or hubs. Use a  
crossover cable for direct connection to  
PC, and a straight cable when connecting  
via a hub.  
100BASE-T  
Straight LAN Cable  
Consult the network administrator when  
connecting to an existing LAN line.  
Caution  
[LAN] Terminal  
VR-716 (Rear Panel)  
• Simultaneous playback of images from 1  
VR-716 on multiple PCs is not possible.  
AUDIO IN  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
VIDEO IN  
THRU OUT  
SCSI  
CAUTION  
AUDIO OUT  
VIDEO OUT  
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK  
DO NOT OPEN  
LAN  
1
2
1
2
AVIS:RISQUE DE CHOC  
ELECTRIQ  
RS-232C  
UPS  
1
4/ 16  
12  
5
8
AC IN  
(220V–240V  
)
SIGNAL GND  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
1
1
3
1
5
R
S
T
C
O
M
IN  
IN  
EXT REC  
CLK SER  
WAR RST REC  
OUT OUT OUT  
10 12 14 16 OUT  
ALARM  
9
1
3
1
6
COM  
EE OUT  
Connecting to a Peer-to-peer Network  
Note  
What is peer-to-peer?  
Page 110  
Caution  
100BASE-T Cross LAN Cable  
• Unplug the power cord of VR-716 before  
connecting the LAN cable.  
[LAN] Terminal  
VR-716 (Rear Panel)  
AUDIO IN  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
VIDEO IN  
THRU OUT  
SCSI  
CAUTION  
AUDIO OUT  
VIDEO OUT  
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK  
DO NOT OPEN  
LAN  
1
2
1
2
AVIS:RISQUE DE CHOC  
ELECTRIQ  
RS-232C  
UPS  
1
4/ 16  
12  
5
8
AC IN  
(220V–240V  
)
SIGNAL GND  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
1
1
3
1
5
R
S
T
C
O
M
IN  
IN  
EXT REC  
CLK SER  
WAR RST REC  
OUT OUT OUT  
10 12 14 16 OUT  
ALARM  
9
1
3
1
6
COM  
EE OUT  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up a Network for VR-716  
Perform the initial setup at the main unit of  
VR-716 by referring to the monitor screen  
connected to VR-716.  
1.  
Press the [MENU] button  
MAIN MENU/OPERATION MENU  
CLOCK SET  
ONSCREEN MODE  
FDP/BUZZER  
REC MODE  
• Use [  
] to move the cursor to “NET-  
WORK”.  
CAMERA TITLE  
OPERATION/EXT REC  
MONITOR DISPLAY  
ALARM SENSOR MODE  
PROGRAM TIMER  
NETWORK  
MENU  
1.5.  
DISK UTILITY/MAINTENANCE  
HDD  
OPERATE  
SEARCH  
MENU  
REV  
FWD  
2.  
Press the [  
] button  
NETWORK  
LOCK  
OUT  
1.HOST NAME  
2.METHOD  
3.IP ADDRESS  
4.NET MASK  
5.DEFAULT GATEWAY  
6.NAME SERVER  
vr716  
STATIC  
192.168. 0. 10  
255.255.255.  
192.168. 0.254  
0. 0. 0.  
• Displays the “NETWORK” screen.  
0
EXECUTE  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
0
SKIP  
00:80:88:40:b0:00  
MAC ADDRESS  
<= :RETURN  
[CANCEL]:DELETE  
1.2.3.4.  
3.  
Factory settings are as follows:  
“METHOD”  
: “STATIC” (DHCP not used)  
: 192.168.0.10  
“IP ADDRESS”  
“NET MASK”  
: 255.255.255.0  
“DEFAULT GATEWAY”  
: 192.168.0.254  
Consult the network administrator if there are prescribed settings in  
the LAN environment for which VR-716 is to be connected.  
Notes  
• If DHCP is selected, DHCP server assigned  
by IP address will be displayed when dis-  
playing this menu again after exiting it.(Can-  
not be altered.)  
3.  
Press [  
altered and turn the jog dial.  
] to move the cursor to the item to be  
• When “DHCP” is selected, this unit will only  
acquire the IP address during startup or  
changing of setting. When the network is  
valid after startup, to acquire the IP address,  
set “METHODback toDHCPif it has been  
set otherwise.  
NETWORK  
1.HOST NAME  
2.METHOD  
3.IP ADDRESS  
4.NET MASK  
5.DEFAULT GATEWAY  
6.NAME SERVER  
REV  
FWD  
vr716  
STATIC  
192.168. 0. 10  
255.255.255.  
192.168. 0.254  
0. 0. 0.  
0
0
MAC ADDRESS  
00:80:88:40:b0:00  
<= :RETURN  
[CANCEL]:DELETE  
4.  
5.  
Move the cursor to<=: RETURNusing [  
press [  
] and  
]
NETWORK  
1.HOST NAME  
2.METHOD  
3.IP ADDRESS  
4.NET MASK  
5.DEFAULT GATEWAY  
6.NAME SERVER  
vr716  
STATIC  
192.168. 0. 10  
255.255.255.  
192.168. 0.254  
0. 0. 0.  
0
0
MAC ADDRESS  
00:80:88:40:b0:00  
<= :RETURN  
[CANCEL]:DELETE  
Press [MENU] to end setting  
• The display returns to the normal screen. (“IP ADDRESS SETTING IN  
PROGRESS...may be displayed.)  
MENU  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to a PC – Connecting to a Web Browser and Setting Up – (continued)  
The following illustrates how to set up a small LAN using VR-716’s factory settings.  
Example  
HDD  
OPERATE  
CANCEL  
SEARCH  
MENU  
1
2
ALARM  
5
6
REV  
FWD  
SENSOR  
“METHOD”  
“IP ADDRESS”  
“SUBNET MASK”  
“DEFAULT GATEWAY” : 192.168.0.254  
“Workgroup”  
: [STATIC] (DHCP not used)  
: 192.168.0.10  
3
4
ALARM  
7
8
TIMER  
LOCK  
SENSOR  
9
10  
ALARM  
13  
14  
OUT  
SENSOR  
DISPLAY  
EXECUTE  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
PC for Web Browser  
Operation  
SEQUENCE  
MULTI  
REC  
STOP  
PLAY  
STILL  
11  
1
ALARM  
15  
16  
SKIP  
SENSOR  
: 255.255.255.0  
: [WORKGROUP]  
LAN  
Hub  
Method  
: STATIC  
“IP address”  
“Subnet mask”  
“Default gateway”  
“Workgroup”  
: 192.168.0.11  
: 255.255.255.0  
: 192.168.0.254  
: [WORKGROUP]  
Other Network PC 2  
Other Network PC 1  
Method  
: STATIC  
Method  
: STATIC  
“IP address”  
“Subnet mask”  
“Default gateway”  
“Workgroup”  
: 192.168.0.13  
: 255.255.255.0  
: 192.168.0.254  
: [WORKGROUP]  
“IP address”  
“Subnet mask”  
“Default gateway”  
“Workgroup”  
: 192.168.0.12  
: 255.255.255.0  
: 192.168.0.254  
: [WORKGROUP]  
Setting Up a PC Network (Windows XP)  
When Using Windows XP  
1.  
Click the  
button  
• Right-click on “My Network Places” and select “Properties”.  
Notes  
• Install accordingly if [Client for Microsoft  
Networks] and [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)]  
are not displayed.  
Refer to Windows Help Menu for the in-  
stallation procedure.  
2.  
Select the network for which the PC used for Web  
browser operation is connected  
• Right-click and select “Properties”.  
What is TCP/IP?  
Page 110  
What is DHCP?  
Page 110  
What is Workgroup?  
Page 110  
1 Check the ticked items.  
• Proceed to page 80 step 3.  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up a PC Network (Windows 2000)  
When Using Windows 2000  
1.  
Click the  
• Click “Settings” z “Control Panel”.  
button  
• Double-click to open the “Network and Dial-up Connections” screen.  
2.  
Select “Local Area Connection”  
• Right-click “Local Area Connection” and click “Properties”.  
Click “Properties”.  
1
• Proceed to page 80 step 3.  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to a PC – Connecting to a Web Browser and Setting Up – (continued)  
Setting Up a PC Network (Windows 2000/XP)  
3.  
Select [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)] and click  
Note  
• This is the screen of Windows XP. The  
screen will be slightly different in the case  
of Windows 2000.  
Select [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)].  
1
Click “Properties”.  
2
Caution  
• Do not use the same “IP address” within a  
network environment during setting.  
Select “Use the following IP  
address”.  
3
Set the “IP address” to  
192.168.0.11.  
4
Set the “Subnet mask” to  
255.255.255.0.  
5
Set the “Default gateway” to  
192.168.0.254.  
6
7
Click “OK”.  
4.  
Click  
erties” screen.  
on theLocal Area Connection Prop-  
Click “OK”.  
1
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting (Login) to the Network  
1.  
2.  
Start the Web browser  
Enter the IP address for VR-716 in  
setting: 192.168.0.10)  
(factory  
1
2
Enter the IP address  
(factory setting: 192.168.0.10)  
Click “ Go”.  
3.  
Enter the login password for VR-716  
Note  
1
Enter [admin] (lower case).  
Login password to VR-716 can be altered  
via operation at the web browser.  
Page 94  
2
3
Enter [vr-716] (lower case).  
Click “OK”.  
Factory setting:  
User name : [admin] (lower case)  
Password : [vr-716] (lower case)  
Top Page  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to a PC – Routine Uses of the Web Browser –  
Setting a Title for Each Camera Channel Screen  
1.  
2.  
Click  
z
Set the camera title  
Notes  
• Up to 15 characters can be used when  
setting the camera title.  
• Clicking [SAVE] with the field left blank will  
reset the camera title.  
• Click [SAVE] to save the title at VR-716.  
• Corrections cannot be made once [SAVE]  
is clicked. To make corrections, re-enter  
the title.  
1
2
Click the [Check] box.  
Enter characters of  
the camera title.  
• Click [RESET] will restore the value on the  
main unit.  
• When the [Camera **] under [Input No.] is  
displayed in orange, it indicates that the  
“Camera **” item under the “REC MODE”  
menu in the main menu is set to “OFF”.  
Click [SAVE].  
3
Caution  
• Camera title input is disabled if [Check]  
box is not clicked.  
• Click [SAVE] only after all camera titles  
have been updated.  
• Alteration of camera titles is not possible  
when VR-716 is in the Recording mode.  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Record Program Using the Program Timer (Setting Screen)  
1.  
Click  
z
z
Display Area in Program List forWeeklyTimer  
• [PROGRAM LIST FOR WEEKLY TIMER] can be  
displayed, updated or deleted.  
Note  
• The [PROGRAM LIST FOR WEEKLY  
TIMER] has the following meaning:  
SPE: REC SPEED  
QUL: REC QUALITY  
AUD: AUDIO REC  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to a PC – Routine Uses of the Web Browser – (continued)  
Record Program Using the Program Timer (Start recording on a specific time of the week)  
<Example> Execute recording from 8:00 a.m. every Friday ~ 5:00 p.m. every Saturday.  
Recording Mode  
• [CAMERA] 1 - 4  
[REC SPEED]  
• [CAMERA] 5 - 8  
[REC SPEED]  
• [CAMERA] 9 - 12  
[REC SPEED]  
• [CAMERA] 13 - 16  
: 12.5  
: 25  
: 2.5  
[REC SPEED]  
: 1/2  
[REC QUALITY] : [H]  
[AUDIO REC] : [ON]  
[REC QUALITY] : [N]  
[REC QUALITY] : [N]  
[REC QUALITY] : [B]  
[AUDIO REC]  
: [ON]  
[AUDIO REC]  
: [OFF]  
[AUDIO REC]  
: [OFF]  
1.  
Click  
z
z
Notes  
• A maximum of 8 record programs can be  
set using the Weekly Timer.  
• Only numbers that have not been pro-  
grammed are displayed in the [PRO-  
GRAM] field.  
1
2
Select the Program No..  
Select the day/time for  
recording to start and  
end.  
• When [1/12 IPS] (1 image per 12 seconds)  
or [1/6 IPS] (1 image per 6 seconds) is se-  
lected for [REC SPEED], audio recording  
is set automatically to “OFF” and this can-  
not be altered.  
3
Select the [REC  
SPEED], [REC  
QUALITY] and [AUDIO  
REC] for each camera  
channel.  
• Click [SAVE] to save settings at VR-716.  
• Click [RESET] when settings are incor-  
rectly entered.  
• Upon clicking [SAVE], restoration of the  
original preset value will not be possible.  
Select [WEEKLY].  
Click [SAVE].  
4
5
Caution  
• When all the “CAMERA” settings of a par-  
ticular “BLOCKinVR-716’s “REC MODE”  
Menu are set to “OFF”, the “FRAME  
RATE”, “REC QUALITYandAUDIO REC”  
settings for that block cannot be altered.  
• Refer to the notes related to SummerTime.  
(Page 116)  
6
Check program setting  
at the display area of  
the Program List for  
Weekly Timer.  
2.  
Set to the Program Timer Standby mode  
Page 88 ‘Setting VR-716 to the Program Timer Standby Mode’  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Record Program Using the Program Timer (Start recording at a specific time everyday)  
<Example> Execute recording from 8:00 a.m. ~ 5:00 p.m. everyday.  
Recording Mode  
• [CAMERA] 1 - 4  
[REC SPEED]  
• [CAMERA] 5 - 8  
[REC SPEED]  
• [CAMERA] 9 - 12  
[REC SPEED]  
• [CAMERA] 13 - 16  
: 12.5  
: 25  
: 2.5  
[REC SPEED]  
: 1/2  
[REC QUALITY] : [H]  
[AUDIO REC] : [ON]  
[REC QUALITY] : [N]  
[REC QUALITY] : [N]  
[AUDIO REC] : [OFF]  
[REC QUALITY] : [B]  
[AUDIO REC]  
: [ON]  
[AUDIO REC]  
: [OFF]  
1.  
Click  
z
z
Notes  
Select the Program  
1
2
• [END] DAY cannot be set if [DAY] is se-  
lected for [START] DAY.  
• Only [ON] or [OFF] can be selected under  
[EXEC] if [DAY] is selected for [START]  
DAY.  
No..  
Select the day/time for  
recording to start and  
end. Set [START] DAY  
to [DAY].  
3
Select the [REC  
SPEED], [REC  
QUALITY] and [AUDIO  
REC] for each camera  
channel.  
4
5
Select [ON].  
Caution  
Check that all days of a  
week have been  
selected.  
• Refer to the notes related to SummerTime.  
(Page 116)  
Click [SAVE].  
Note  
Program List for Weekly Timer  
Press [UP] to change and [DEL] to clear  
preset values.  
Program List for Weekly  
Timer  
2.  
Set to the Program Timer Standby mode  
Page 88 ‘Setting VR-716 to the Program Timer Standby Mode’  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to a PC – Routine Uses of the Web Browser – (continued)  
Record Program Using the Program Timer (Start recording on a specific day and time)  
<Example> Execute recording from 9:30 a.m. ~ 10:30 p.m. on every Monday, Wednesday and Friday.  
Recording Mode  
• [CAMERA] 1 - 4  
[REC SPEED]  
• [CAMERA] 5 - 8  
[REC SPEED]  
• [CAMERA] 9 - 12  
[REC SPEED]  
• [CAMERA] 13 - 16  
: 12.5  
: 25  
: 2.5  
[REC SPEED]  
: 1/2  
[REC QUALITY] : [H]  
[REC QUALITY] : [N]  
[REC QUALITY] : [N]  
[AUDIO REC] : [OFF]  
[REC QUALITY] : [B]  
[AUDIO REC]  
: [ON]  
[AUDIO REC]  
: [ON]  
[AUDIO REC]  
: [OFF]  
1.  
Click  
z
z
Notes  
Select the Program No..  
1
2
• [END] DAY cannot be set if [DAY] is se-  
lected for [START] DAY.  
• Only [ON] or [OFF] can be selected under  
[EXEC] if [DAY] is selected for [START]  
DAY.  
Select the day/time for  
recording to start and  
end. Set [START DAY]  
to [DAY].  
Select the [REC  
SPEED], [REC  
3
QUALITY] and [AUDIO  
REC] for each camera  
channel.  
Caution  
Select [ON].  
4
5
• Refer to the notes related to SummerTime.  
(Page 116)  
Select [***] for setting  
other than [MON],  
[WED] and [FRI].  
Click [SAVE].  
7
6
Click [UP] to update  
setting for the Program  
No. selected in 1.  
Notes  
• [DAILY MODE] can be set when [DAY] is  
selected at [START] DAY. Select [***] for  
days for which recording is not to be ex-  
ecuted, followed by clicking [SAVE].  
Program List for Weekly  
Timer.  
Program List for Weekly Timer  
Press [UP] to change and [DEL] to clear  
preset values.  
Be careful when [DAY] is selected for other  
Program Nos. As all record programs with  
[DAY] selected will be set at the same time.  
• Click [SAVE] to save settings at VR-716.  
• Click [RESET] when settings are incor-  
rectly entered. This restores the setting  
saved at the recorder.  
2.  
Set to the Program Timer Standby mode  
Page 88 ‘Setting VR-716 to the Program Timer Standby Mode’  
• Upon clicking [SAVE], restoration of the  
original preset value will not be possible.  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Record Program Using the Program Timer (Start recording at a specific date)  
<Example> Execute recording from 8:00 a.m. ~ 11:00 p.m. on 1 October.  
Recording Mode  
• [CAMERA] 1 - 4  
[REC SPEED]  
• [CAMERA] 5 - 8  
DO NOT RECORD  
• [CAMERA] 9 - 12  
[REC SPEED]  
• [CAMERA] 13 - 16  
DO NOT RECORD  
: 8.3  
: 4.2  
[REC QUALITY] : [H]  
[REC QUALITY] : [B]  
[AUDIO REC]  
: [ON]  
[AUDIO REC]  
: [OFF]  
1.  
Click  
z
z
Notes  
Select the Program No..  
1
• A maximum of 16 timer programs can be  
set for a specific recording mode in the  
Date Timer Setup.  
• Click [RESET] to restore the value previ-  
ously saved.  
2
3
Select the date to  
execute record.  
Select the time to start/  
end record program.  
• Click [SAVE] to save settings at VR-716.  
• Click [RESET] when settings are incor-  
rectly entered.  
• Upon clicking [SAVE], restoration of the  
original preset value will not be possible.  
Select the [REC  
4
5
SPEED], [REC  
QUALITY], [AUDIO  
REC] and [EXEC] for  
each camera channel.  
Click [SAVE].  
Caution  
• When all the “CAMERA” settings of a par-  
ticular “BLOCK” inVR-716’s “REC MODE”  
Menu are set to “OFF”, the “FRAME  
RATE”, “REC QUALITYandAUDIO REC”  
settings for that block cannot be altered.  
• Refer to the notes related to SummerTime.  
(Page 116)  
Program List for Date  
Timer.  
2.  
Set to the Program Timer Standby mode  
Page 88 ‘Setting VR-716 to the Program Timer Standby Mode’  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to a PC – Routine Uses of the Web Browser – (continued)  
Setting VR-716 to the Program Timer Standby Mode  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Click  
z
z
Note  
• Timer mode cannot be executed if none  
of the Timer Program execution mode is  
activated and sensor setting is not per-  
formed.  
1
Click [TIMER MODE].  
Click  
Notes  
Click the [ON] button.  
1
• Operations after setting the [TIMER  
MODE] to [OFF] are reflected on the [Re-  
lease Timer operation] screen.  
Page 88  
• Alteration of settings and termination of  
recording related to [ReleaseTimer opera-  
tion] is not possible via the Web browser.  
Page 54  
To undo the Timer Standby mode, click  
Caution  
• The [OFF] button is displayed when the  
[TIMER STANDBY MODE] is activated.  
Double-check the [Release Timer opera-  
tion] before using.  
Click the [OFF] button.  
1
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Checking Recording Operation After Release Timer is Executed  
1.  
Click  
z
z
Note  
• Release the Timer mode at VR-716. Se-  
lect one of the 3 operations below after  
Timer mode is released:  
Click [AFTER RELEASE].  
1
[CONTINUE]:  
Recording will continue when Timer Re-  
cording is currently executed.  
[STOP]:  
Switches to the Stop mode regardless of  
whether Timer Recording is currently ex-  
ecuted.  
[NORMAL REC]:  
Switches to the Normal Recording mode  
regardless of whether Timer Recording is  
currently executed.  
Current status of the  
[Release Timer operation]  
is displayed.  
2
(Example)  
[AFTER RELEASE]:  
[CONTINUE]  
9 Operation after Release Timer: [STOP]  
9 Operation after Release Timer: [NORMAL  
REC]  
Caution  
• ReleaseTimer operation settings can only  
be viewed at the Web browser. Alteration  
is not possible.  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to a PC – Routine Uses of the Web Browser – (continued)  
Changing/Deleting Record Programs in the Program Timer  
[WEEKLY TIMER] Programs  
1.  
Click  
z
z
To alter a record  
program.  
Click [UP] to change  
settings in the setting  
area of [WEEKLY TIMER  
SETUP].  
Notes  
To cancel a record  
program. Click [DEL].  
• Upon clicking the [UP] button, current val-  
ues will be displayed in the setting area of  
[WEEKLY TIMER SETUP].  
To execute/undo the Program Timer, click  
[UP] for each program and set [EXEC] in  
the setting area to [ON] / [OFF].  
• When [DEL] is clicked, program settings  
will be discarded (cleared) in both Weekly  
and DateTimers and initial settings will be  
restored.To restore the values prior to click-  
ing [DEL], perform the Timer Recording  
setting again.  
[DATE TIMER] Programs  
1.  
Click  
z
z
To cancel a record  
program. Click [DEL].  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Searching Image According to Date/Time (Event Search)  
Searching Alarm/Sensor recording  
<Selection items for 1>  
• From all the alarm/sensor channels  
• ch 1 ~ ch 16 (specify by camera channel)  
1.  
Click  
z
z
Select alarm/sensor  
channel to search.  
1
2
<Selection items for 3>  
• [BEFORE]:  
Displays alarm events prior to the speci-  
fied time in 5 starting from the most cur-  
rent event.  
Specify a date/time.  
• [AFTER]:  
Displays alarm events after the specified  
time in 5 starting from the oldest event.  
Select the display mode  
of search results.  
3
4
Click [SEARCH].  
Notes  
• A maximum of 15 events can be displayed  
during every search.  
• When search result exceeds 15, a [Next  
15 Events] button will be displayed below  
the list of search results. Click the [Next  
15 Events] to display the next 15 results.  
• Click the [Previous 15 Events] in the same  
way to display the previous results.  
• Alarm search cannot be executed if alarm  
data is deleted at VR-716.  
<Display details in 5>  
• [ALARM NO]  
• [TYPE]  
[A] : Alarm Recording (Orange)  
[S] : Sensor Recording (Orange)  
(In the case of alarm/sensor recording  
by “MOTION DETECT”, [M] is also dis-  
played.)  
Search results are  
displayed.  
5
[P] : Presensor Recording (Pink)  
• [CHANNEL]:  
Indicating the number of camera for input.  
This will be displayed in white for normal  
recording, in orange for alarm/sensor re-  
cording, in pink for presensor recording  
and in red only for the channel which re-  
ceived alarm input among the alarm/sen-  
sor recording.  
Close the search  
results screen.  
6
• [START]  
• [END]  
• [DURATION]  
2.  
Click the  
button for the event to be viewed  
Caution  
• This opens up the Viewer window and starts to playback images of the  
camera channel for which alarm/sensor recording is executed.  
(Page 99)  
• Installation of the bundled application soft-  
ware [VR-716 Player] is required in order  
to view the playback images.  
• Refer to the notes related to SummerTime.  
(Page 116)  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to a PC – Routine Uses of the Web Browser – (continued)  
Searching Image According to Date/Time (Event Search)  
Search By Date/Time  
1.  
Click  
z
z
Input date of the image  
to playback.  
1
2
<Selection items for 2>  
• From all the camera channels  
• ch 1 ~ ch 16 (specify by camera channel)  
• ch 1 ~ ch 4, ch 5 ~ ch 8, ch 9 ~ ch 12, ch  
13 ~ ch 16 (specify by block)  
Select a camera  
channel (optional).  
Click [SEARCH].  
3
<Display details in 4>  
• [TYPE]  
Search results are  
displayed.  
4
[A] : Alarm Recording (Orange)  
[S] : Sensor Recording (Orange)  
[P] : Presensor Recording (Pink)  
[N] : Normal Recording (White)  
• [START]  
• [END]  
• [DURATION]  
• [CHANNEL]  
Caution  
• Installation of the bundled application soft-  
ware [VR-716 Player] is required in order  
to view the playback images.  
• Refer to the notes related to SummerTime.  
(Page 116)  
5
Close the search  
results screen.  
2.  
To view a particular event, click the  
that event  
button for  
• This opens up the Viewer window and starts playback of images from the  
specified date.  
(Page 99)  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Searching Image According to Date/Time (Event Search)  
Search By Term  
1.  
Click  
z
z
<Selection items for 2>  
• [ASC]:  
Input the Start/End  
Date.  
1
2
Displays results from the oldest event.  
• [DESC]:  
Displays results from the most current  
event.  
Select the display  
mode of search results.  
Select a camera  
3
4
<Selection items for 3>  
channel (optional).  
• From all the camera channels  
• ch 1 ~ ch 16 (specify by camera channel)  
• ch 1 ~ ch 4, ch 5 ~ ch 8, ch 9 ~ ch 12, ch  
13 ~ ch 16 (specify by block)  
To refine search, select  
a condition accordingly.  
<Selection items for 4>  
Click [SEARCH].  
5
• [All Event REC] (Displays events of all re-  
cording data.)  
• [All the alarm/sensor channels] (Displays  
only events of alarm/sensor recording.)  
• [Only Normal REC] (Displays recording  
events except those of alarm/sensor re-  
cording.)  
6
Search results are  
displayed.  
<Display details in 6>  
• [TYPE]  
[A] : Alarm Recording (Orange)  
[S] : Sensor Recording (Orange)  
[P] : Presensor Recording (Pink)  
[N] : Normal Recording (White)  
• [START]  
• [END]  
• [DURATION]  
• [CHANNEL]  
Notes  
• A maximum of 15 search results can be  
displayed on the screen at a time.  
• When search result exceeds 15, a [Next  
15 Events] button will be displayed below  
the list of search results. Click the [Next  
15 Events] to display the next 15 results.  
• Click the [Previous 15 Events] in the same  
way to display the previous results.  
2.  
Click the  
button for the event to be viewed  
• This opens up the Viewer window and starts playback. (Page 100)  
Caution  
• Installation of the bundled application soft-  
ware [VR-716 Player] is required in order  
to view the playback images.  
• Refer to the notes related to SummerTime.  
(Page 116)  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to a PC – Useful Browser Features –  
Restricting Access to VR-716  
When there are multiple users sharing a VR-716 in a network environment, authorization of access rights of varying degrees to  
individual users will be necessary in order to protect VR-716 settings or data.  
At VR-716, the level of sharing can be specified according to the folders in which image files (event files) are stored.  
1.  
Click  
z
Notes  
• Refer to the Windows Help Menu to find  
out the user name set on Windows.  
• The different levels of access rights are il-  
lustrated as follows:  
Enter a user name  
(arbitrary).  
1
2
Enter user name as  
specified on Windows.  
VR-716 Timer  
Event  
Utility  
setting setting setting  
3
Enter password. Make  
sure not to forget the  
password.  
[Administrators]  
[Operators]  
[Users]  
Yes  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
4
5
Enter again to verify the  
password.  
• The 2 user names below are included in  
the factory settings:  
Select one of the Access  
Rights.  
1
2
[Login Name]  
[Password]  
[admin]  
[guest]  
6
Click [SAVE].  
[vr-716]  
[vr-716]  
[Access Rights] [Administrators]  
[Operators]  
Viewing the List of Registered Access Users  
1.  
Click  
z
Caution  
1
The list of registered  
users is displayed.  
• When alteration is made to the registered  
Access User, ensure to perform account  
registration on Windows with the same  
user name and password.  
Refer to Windows Help Menu for the reg-  
istration procedure of user accounts.  
• If the current Administrators’ rights pass-  
word is forgotten, restoration by the user  
will not be possible. (Page 107)  
Click [DELETE] to clear  
data of the registered  
user.  
Click [UPDATE] to alter  
data of the registered  
user.  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Restricting Access to Recorded Image Files at VR-716  
When there are multiple users sharing a VR-716 in a network environment, authorization of access rights of varying degrees to  
individual users will be necessary in order to protect VR-716 settings or file.  
At VR-716, the level of sharing can be specified according to the folders in which image files (event files) are stored.  
<Selection items for 1>  
• [SHARE]:  
Verifies only passwords that are registered  
in the Access User Setup (Page 94).  
• [USER]:  
1.  
Click  
z
Verifies both user name and password.  
Select [Security].  
1
2
Enter the [Workgroup]  
name registered with LAN.  
Note  
A list of image data will  
be displayed when [YES]  
is selected.  
3
4
• Factory settings:  
[Security]  
[Workgroup]  
[Browseable]  
: [SHARE]  
: [WORKGROUP]  
: [YES]  
Click [SAVE].  
Caution  
• When access rights are altered during  
playback of image files, reboot ofWindows  
will be required.  
Page 110 ‘Browsing Function’  
The [Security] and [Browseable] settings combine to yield 4 selectable levels of secu-  
rity.  
Security Level  
High  
Low  
[Security]  
[SHARE]  
[YES]  
[USER]  
[NO]  
[USER]  
[YES]  
[USER]  
[NO]  
[Browseable]  
Verifies [Login Name] and  
[Password] of registered  
users of VR-716. Unregis-  
tered users can gain ac-  
cess using [guest] and no  
password.  
The list of image files can-  
not be viewed on other  
PCs.  
Verifies [Login Name] and  
[Password] of registered  
users of VR-716.  
The list of image files can  
also be viewed on other  
PCs within the same net-  
work.  
Verifies [Login Name] and  
[Password] of registered  
users of VR-716.  
The list of image files can-  
not be viewed on other  
PCs.  
Verifies [Login Name] and  
[Password] of registered  
users ofVR-716.Unregis-  
tered users can gain ac-  
cess using [guest] and no  
password.  
The list of image files can  
also be viewed on other  
PCs within the same net-  
work.  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to a PC – Useful Browser Features – (continued)  
Changing Network Settings of VR-716 from PC  
Details in the “NETWORK” Menu of VR-716 can be altered via operation on a Web browser.  
1.  
Click  
z
Caution  
• When network settings of VR-716 are  
changed, network settings need to be al-  
tered accordingly at the PC. Consult the  
network administrator when making alter-  
ations.  
• Upon changing network settings of VR-  
716, change the network settings at the  
PC as well, followed by restarting theWeb  
browser.  
Select the method of IP  
address setting.  
1
[Static]:  
DHCP server not used.  
[DHCP]:  
Uses DHCP server.  
[None]:  
Prohibits all network  
connections.  
2
Enter the name used to  
denote your PC in the  
network environment.  
Notes  
What is [Domain name]?  
Page 110  
What is [DHCP]?  
Page 110  
What is [Host name]?  
Page 110  
3
4
Enter the domain name.  
Enter the [IP Address],  
[Subnet Mask], [Default  
Gateway] and [Name  
Server].  
5
Click [SAVE].  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mail Notification Setting During Alarm/Sensor Input  
In a network environment where use of a mail server (SMTP) is possible, mail notification setting can be performed at VR-716 to  
send out the alarm list during alarm/sensor input in the form of notification messages on a regular basis.  
1.  
Click  
z
<Selection items for 1>  
• [None]:  
Disables the mail notification feature.  
• [Alarm/Sensor]:  
Sends out mail notification during alarm/  
sensor input.  
Select a [Mode].  
1
2
Register the [Mail (SMTP)  
Server ].  
Notes  
Select an [Interval] for  
sending out notification  
messages (5, 10, 15 or  
30 minutes).  
3
4
• When using the mail notification feature,  
perform settings described in page 96Net-  
work Settings’ as well.  
To use the mail notification feature, the  
following information must be registered.  
• Mode  
Register the mail  
address of the [To E-  
MAIL].  
• Mail (SMTP) Server  
(Enter the domain name.)  
• Sender’s Mail Address  
• Minimum Mail Notification Interval  
• Receiver’s Mail Address  
Register the mail  
address of the [From  
E-MAIL].  
5
6
Click [SAVE].  
• Notification mails can be sent out to mul-  
tiple receivers by inserting [ , ] or a space  
between the receivers’ mail addresses.  
(Maximum no. of input characters is 254)  
• The following is registered as the [Subject:]  
in the factory settings:  
[Starting Alarm/Sensor REC!!]  
(Maximum no. of input characters is 32)  
• [Normal] or [Short] can also be selected  
from the [List Form] as the mode of mes-  
sage display.  
Upon setting, the mail notification feature can be  
checked to ensure that it is properly functioning.  
• Clicking [SAVE] at the [E-MAIL SETUP] screen displays a confirmation  
screen.  
Caution  
• Mail notification may fail depending on the  
authentication method at the mail server.  
• Consult your network administrator on the  
mail server’s settings.  
• A complete alarm/sensor list may not be  
received depending on the maximum no.  
of characters a mobile can receive.  
• Regardless of the interval setting of mail  
notification, the mail notification will be sent  
within 10 minutes from the first alarm/sen-  
sor input. It may take much time before  
data can be received depending on the  
network environment.  
Click [TEST E-MAIL].  
1
• Click [TEST E-MAIL] to issue a test mail. Check that this mail is received  
at the specified destination.  
• When sending of notification fails due to errors in the settings or network,  
an error message will be displayed. Check the mail notification as well as  
network settings.  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to a PC – Useful Browser Features – (continued)  
The notification mail received during alarm/sensor input will look as follows:  
Mail Header  
From: xxxxx@xxxxx.co.jp  
To: xxxxx@xxxxx.co.jp  
The content in the [Subject] will be reflected.  
Subject: Starting Alarm/Sensor REC!!  
Message (Normal List Format)  
• ALARM/SENSOR NOTIFICATION  
VR-716’s host name will be reflected as the Host Name. The content  
registered at [Location Name] is also reflected in [ ].  
Host name:  
VR-716 [3rd factory]  
The following alarm/sensor recording has been started:  
-----------------------  
01/08/2003(FRI) 20:15:15 A 3ch [INF.], 4ch [ENTRANCE]  
01/08/2003(FRI) 20:15:17 S 9ch [ ]  
Lists data of alarm/sensor that are triggered within the specified  
minimum notification interval. The list contains 3 types of information  
as shown below:  
01/08/2003(FRI) 20:18:15 A 13ch [N. GATE], 14ch [ ], 16ch [ ]  
-----------------------  
• Alarm/Sensor Activation Time  
• Recording Mode  
A: Alarm recording  
S: Sensor recording  
• Camera Channel [Camera Title]  
The End  
Message (Short List Format)  
RECORD NOTIF.  
----------------  
HOST. vr716  
Note  
• Only the language of the mail message changes in  
accordance with the “LANGUAGE SELECTION” in the  
main menu. (page 25)  
[3rd factory]  
----------------  
LIST DISPLAY  
14/10/2003  
----------------  
clock: 19:39:18  
Mode: A  
CamCh: 3[INF.], 4[ENTRANCE]  
----------------  
clock: 19:39:39  
Mode: S  
Caution  
• There will be a few seconds difference between the  
alarm notification list and the actual time when record-  
ing starts.  
• Refer to the notes related to Summer Time.  
(Page 116)  
CamCh: 6[ ]  
----------------  
clock: 19:39:45  
Mode: A  
CamCh: 13[N. GATE], 14[ ], 16[ ]  
----------------  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Viewing Images of Event Search Results (Simple Viewer)  
Installation of the bundled application software [VR-716 Player] will be required prior to using the Simple  
Viewer. Otherwise, it cannot be used to view event images of search results.  
Caution  
1.  
Search for an event  
Page 91 ‘Searching Image According to Date/Time’  
• Playback using the Simple Viewer may stop or playback  
speed may be unstable as priority is given to recording or  
other forms of internal processing over outgoing process-  
ing to the network.  
• Network playback of VR-716 via simultaneous connection  
by multiple PCs is not possible.  
2.  
Click the  
viewed  
button for the event to be  
Displays the Viewer window.  
• There may be cases whereby recorded image file with  
audio may not be fully displayed.  
• Refer to the notes related to Summer Time. (Page 116)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
!
Control Panel  
Image Display Area  
Recording Mode  
Names and Functions  
[NORMAL]  
Recording using the (  
r) button at VR-  
716.  
1
2
3
[START]  
Displays the date/time recording started.  
[END]  
Displays the date/time recording ended.  
[TYPE]  
[NORMAL (SPLIT)]  
Splits up automatically in the Normal  
Recording mode during recording over  
extensive periods of time.  
[PRESENSOR]  
[ALARM]  
When “PRESENSOR REC” is set to “ON”  
at VR-716 .  
Displays the mode of recording and the camera channels.  
This will be displayed in white for normal recording, in or-  
ange for alarm/sensor recording, in pink for presensor re-  
cording and in red when there is alarm input during alarm/  
sensor recording. (See right diagram)  
When recording mode is set to “ALARM”  
at VR-716.  
[SENSOR]  
When recording mode is set to “SEN-  
SOR” at VR-716.  
Camera Channel  
[ - ]: No input  
1 ch ~ 16 ch (Multiple channels are displayed during simultaneous  
input)  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to a PC – Useful Browser Features – (continued)  
Viewing Images of Event Search Results (Simple Viewer)  
Functions (continued)  
8
Displays the operational status of the Web Viewer.  
[FILE OPEN]  
Preparation for playback on Web Viewer  
is completed.  
1
2
3
4
[ACCESS FAILED] Preparation for playback on Web Viewer  
failed.  
[TOP OF FILE]  
[END OF FILE]  
[PLAY]  
Top of the file.  
5
End of the file.  
Currently in the Playback mode.  
Currently in the Still mode.  
Currently in the Skip mode.  
Currently in the Reverse Skip mode.  
When internal error has occurred.  
6
7
[PAUSE]  
[FWD SKIP]  
[BACK SKIP]  
[ERROR]  
8
9
0
!
9
[INTERVAL] when using the Skip buttons. [Skip inter-  
val] that can be selected varies according to the frame  
rate of the image files.  
4
[TITLE]  
Displays the registered camera title.  
Check the “REC QUALITY” and “FRAME RATEatVR-  
716.  
[NO TITLE]  
When title is not registered.  
When displaying in quad picture.  
[QUAD DISPLAY]  
“FRAME RATE”  
[INTERVAL]  
[Registered Camera Title display according to the  
Title] camera no..  
[25 IPS] ~ [1 IPS]  
[1 sec], [5 sec], [10 sec], [20 sec], [30 sec], [1 min], [5 min],  
[10 min], [15 min], [30 min] and [1 hour]  
[1/2 IPS]  
[1/6 IPS]  
[1/12 IPS]  
[2 sec], [4 sec], [10 sec], [20 sec], [30 sec], [1 min], [5 min],  
[10 min], [15 min], [30 min] and [1 hour]  
5
Switching between quad picture and single picture  
modes.  
(The Web Viewer automatically identifies screens in quad/  
single picture as well as the camera no..)  
[5 sec], [10 sec], [20 sec], [30 sec], [1 min], [5 min],  
[10 min], [15 min], [30 min] and [1 hour]  
: Displays in single picture.(Displays each camera chan-  
[10 sec], [20 sec], [30 sec], [1 min], [5 min], [10 min],  
[15 min], [30 min] and [1 hour]  
nel no.)  
: Displays in quad picture.  
0
!
ON/OFF switches for [REPEAT] and [MUTE]. Tick  
the Q to turn [ON] the switch.  
The [MUTE] box cannot be ticked for image files with-  
out audio sound. (Displayed as OFF all the time)  
6
7
Displaying the time of playback images.  
Control buttons for the recorded image files.  
: Skip in the reverse direction according to the skip in-  
tervals.  
Click  
to save the still image in BMP format to the  
specified directory (default directory is C:\).The time  
stamp of the recorded image will be used automati-  
cally as the file name of the still image as shown be-  
low:  
: Stop playback and move to the top of the file.  
: Start playback.  
: Stop playback image temporarily.  
Example) n1_20030224_091035001.bmp  
Denotes hh mm ss msec (hour, minute,  
: Skip in the forward direction according to the skip in-  
tervals.  
second, millisecond).  
Denotes YY MM DD (year, month, day).  
Denotes recording mode and block no..  
(a: Alarm Recording s: Sensor/ Presensor  
Recording n: Normal Recording)  
Note  
• If playback is started during continuous alarm recording, it  
will start to playback 2 seconds earlier than the starting time.  
The example shown indicates that images are recorded in the Normal  
Recording mode at Block 1 (Cameras 1-4) on 24/02/2003 at 09:10:35.  
The still image can also be saved to the Desktop by leav-  
ing the directory field empty and pressing [Enter] during  
playback.  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Saving VR-716 Settings to a File  
Caution  
1.  
Click  
z
• As this is a utility feature, ensure to stop  
all operation at VR-716 when executing.  
• Execution of utility features can only be  
performed by users with Administrator  
rights.  
• During downloading, recording, playback  
and onscreen operation at VR-716 will be  
disabled.  
Press [EXEC] to create  
a backup data for  
downloading.  
1
• Download will take a few minutes to com-  
plete.  
• The information related to camera title,  
TIME ZONE, network, mail notification, file  
sharing and access user will not be stored  
into the backup data.  
2.  
Wait for a while for the backup data to be created  
Notes  
• If backup data previously created is saved  
at VR-716, the download screen will be  
displayed together.  
• If backup data that is previously created  
exists, this will be overwritten by the new  
data.  
• The following messages will be displayed  
onscreen during download:  
Operational status will  
2
be checked automati-  
cally at VR-716 in  
intervals of a few  
seconds.  
[NOW READING THE DATA]  
[DOWNLOAD HAS BEEN COMPLETED]  
[DOWNLOAD HAS FAILED]  
NOW PROCESSING  
SUCCEEDED  
FAILED  
Display for 5 seconds (blinking at approx.  
1 sec interval) after download has been  
completed.  
3.  
After backup data is created, click [SAVE] to save  
the data file to the PC  
Click [SAVE].  
3
Note  
• The information on the version no. of VR-  
716 main unit when the data is created as  
well as date/time created (DD/MM/YY  
hh:mm:ss) will be displayed on the [Backup  
data completed] screen.  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to a PC – Useful Browser Features – (continued)  
Caution  
4.  
5.  
6.  
Click “Save”  
• As download is performed via the Web  
browser, a security message will be dis-  
played.  
• For security reasons, check that the down-  
loaded data name is [epbackup.dat] and  
that the sender usesVR-716’s IP address.  
4
5
Check the data name  
and sender.  
Click “Save”.  
Specify a location on the PC for the data to be saved  
Specify the location for  
6
saving the  
[epbackup.dat] data.  
Click “Save”.  
7
Download completed  
8
Click “Close” and check  
that the data has been  
saved to the designated  
location.  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Uploading VR-716 Settings  
Caution  
1.  
Click  
z
• As this is a utility feature, ensure to stop  
all operation at VR-716 when executing.  
• Execution of utility features can only be  
performed by users with Administrator  
rights.  
• During uploading, recording, playback and  
onscreen operation at VR-716 will be dis-  
abled.  
Click [BROWSE] to  
specify a backup data  
file saved on the PC.  
1
• Upload will take a few minutes to complete.  
• For uploading, the information related to  
camera title, TIME ZONE, network, mail  
notification, file sharing and access user  
will not be updated.  
2.  
Specify the backup data file to upload from the PC  
Notes  
• If backup data previously created is saved  
at VR-716, the download screen will be  
displayed together.  
• If backup data that is previously created  
exists, this will be overwritten by the new  
data.  
Enter the file name for  
uploading.  
2
• The following messages will be displayed  
onscreen during upload:  
3
Next, click the “Open”  
button.  
[NOW WRITING THE DATA]  
[UPLOADING HAS BEEN COMPLETED]  
[UPLOADING HAS FAILED]  
NOW PROCESSING  
SUCCEEDED  
FAILED  
Display for 5 seconds (blinking at approx.  
1 sec interval) after upload has been  
completed.  
3.  
4.  
Click [UPDATE] after specifying a backup data file  
Check that the  
4
specified backup data  
is listed.  
Click the [UPDATE]  
button.  
5
Click [EXEC]  
Click the [EXEC]  
button.  
6
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to a PC – Useful Browser Features – (continued)  
Caution  
5.  
Wait for a while when uploading to EEPROM (pro-  
cessing may take a few minutes)  
• Be careful as error may occur if the power  
is turned off during upload to EEPROM.  
• Uploading to EEPROM will take a few min-  
utes.  
• If power is turned off or disconnected dur-  
ing this operation, setting value of this unit  
are not guaranteed.  
Note  
• The backup data that is specified for up-  
loading will contain information on the ver-  
sion no. as well as date/time created (DD/  
MM/YY hh:mm:ss).  
6.  
After uploading is completed, display information  
of the uploaded backup data  
Information About Open Source Software  
1.  
Click  
z
Click [OPEN  
SOURCE].  
1
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Explanations  
Troubleshooting  
Problems Related to Error Code and Onscreen Display  
Error Code Onscreen Display  
Cause  
Refer to Page  
Action  
System restarted due to error  
in the functioning of hard disk.  
Consult your nearest JVC dealer.  
Continue the operation with the intact  
hard disk.  
E-01  
1
2
“E-01 DETECTED.”  
The data in the disconnected hard disk  
will not be recovered if manual scan  
disk is executed.  
Error in the functioning of  
hard disk.  
Consult your nearest JVC dealer.  
E-02  
(Unable to start up)  
No video input signals.  
Stop operation and check the connec-  
tion.  
Double-check settings in the “REC  
MODE” Menu.  
E-03  
2
“NO VIDEO IN** INPUT  
(E-03)”  
P14  
Recording may fail if it is continued  
after the error message is displayed.  
Set the “CAMERA” setting to “OFF”  
in the “REC MODE” Menu or elimi-  
nate the cause of the error immedi-  
ately.  
Displayed when power  
outage occurs.  
This is not an error. Press the [CAN-  
CEL] button to clear the message.  
E-04  
2
“POWER OUTAGE LOG  
IS UPDATED.”  
P71  
Error in the fan motor.  
Consult your nearest JVC dealer.  
E-05  
1
2
“E-05 DETECTED.”  
EEPROM error.  
If this error occurs due to alteration of  
menu setting, turn the equipment off/  
on and check the setting. If this error  
keeps occurring due to alteration of  
menu setting or during operation,  
consult your nearest JVC dealer.  
E-06  
“E-06 DETECTED.”  
1
2
Encoder error.  
Decoder error.  
Consult your nearest JVC dealer.  
E-07  
1
2
“E-07 DETECTED.”  
“E-08 DETECTED.”  
“E-09 DETECTED.”  
Consult your nearest JVC dealer.  
E-08  
1
2
Error at one of the built-in  
hard disk drives.  
This error is detected only during  
Mirroring Setting.  
Consult your nearest JVC dealer.  
E-09  
1
2
Recordable space on the  
hard disk is running out.  
When hard disk space is about to run  
out, make changes accordingly such as  
formanting the hard disk or changing  
setting to Repeat Record mode.  
“HARD-DISK  
CAPACITY IS VERY  
LITTLE”  
P58  
P25  
All event record data will be deleted  
when formatting is executed.  
No space available on the  
hard disk for recording.  
Format the hard disk to create  
recording space or set Repeat REC to  
values other than “OFF”.  
All event record data will be deleted  
when formatting is executed.  
1
3
“NO HARD-DISK  
REMAINING  
CAPACITY”  
P58  
P25  
Self-diagnosis of VR-716 in  
progress.  
This is not an error.  
“MAINTENANCE  
PROCEEDING”  
Error codes are displayed on the front display (page 13) of VR-716.  
1: Buzzer will sound when error occurs.  
2: A signal will be output to [WARNING OUT] terminal when error occurs.  
3: When the hard disk is full, priority is given to this display even if trigger to start recording is received such as by pressing [REC]  
button or alarm input during playback. (Blinks for 5 seconds)  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Explanations (continued)  
Troubleshooting (continued)  
Other Problems  
Symptom  
Cause  
Refer to Page  
Action  
Is the power cable properly  
connected?  
Plug the supplied power cable to the outlet.  
Power cannot be turned  
on.  
Is the Operation Lock turned on?  
Is the [TIMER] indicator on?  
Turn off the Operation Lock  
Press the [TIMER] button to turn off the timer  
program.  
P5  
[REC] and [PLAY]  
buttons do not work.  
P8, P12, P54  
Is the monitor properly connected?  
Are there recorded images on the  
camera selected using the ‘Camera  
Selection’ buttons?  
Connect the monitor properly.  
Select a camera with recorded images.  
P14, P15  
P32, P33  
Playback image is not  
displayed on the  
monitor.  
Is the date/time set?  
Is the [TIMER] indicator on?  
Is the timer program properly set?  
Check the date/time setting.  
Press the [TIMER] button to set to the Program  
Timer Standby mode.  
Double-check the record program of the  
Program Timer.  
P18  
P46~P54  
Unable to start program  
recording using the  
Program Timer  
Is the [TIMER] indicator on?  
Is the Operation Lock turned on?  
Press the [TIMER] button to turn off the timer  
program.  
Turn off the Operation Lock  
P8, P12, P54  
P5  
Menu screen is not  
displayed.  
Are the items set to “OFF” in the  
“ONSCREEN MODE” Menu?  
Set items in the “ONSCREEN MODE” Menu to  
“ON” accordingly to enable them to be displayed  
onscreen.  
P19  
P18  
No onscreen display of  
date/time and title.  
Is the date/time properly set?  
Set the date/time.  
Date/Time is not  
recorded.  
Either the Program Timer is not  
programmed, or there is no record  
program that can be executed.  
Double-check the record program of the  
Program Timer.  
Format the hard disk to create recording space  
or set Repeat REC to values other than “OFF”.  
P46~P54  
P58  
[TIMER] indicator  
blinks.  
Is there sufficient hard disk space?  
Was the “AUDIO REC” item in the  
“REC MODE” menu set to “ON”  
during recording?  
Execute recording with the “AUDIO REC” item in  
the “REC MODE” menu set to “ON”.  
Audio recording is disabled when recording is  
executed with the “FRAME RATE” in the “REC  
MODE” Menu set to “1/6 IPS” (1 image per 6  
seconds) or “1/12 IPS” (1 image per 12 sec-  
onds).  
P24  
Unable to play back  
audio sound.  
Is the date/time properly set?  
Is the Jump setting correct?  
Set the date/time.  
Perform the Jump setting accordingly.  
P18  
P40~P43  
Unable to execute Skip  
Jump or Direct Jump  
System error occurred.  
Disconnect and connect the power cord.  
All the LEDs of camera  
light up in red.  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting on Use of Browsers  
Symptom  
Cause  
Action  
[Operation Locked: (5XX1)] is dis-  
played.  
Operation of VR-716 via the network is prohibited.  
[Normal Recording in Progress:  
(5XX2)] is displayed.  
Normal recording is executed at VR-716.  
[Timer Recording in Progress:  
(5XX3)] is displayed.  
Timer recording using the ProgramTimer is executed  
at VR-716.  
[Timer Sensor Recording in  
Progress: (5XX4)] is displayed.  
Sensor recording is executed while in the Timer  
Recording mode at VR-716.  
Perform operation via theWeb browser after stop-  
ping or ending all operations on VR-716.  
[Alarm Recording in Progress:  
(5XX5)] is displayed.  
Alarm recording is executed at VR-716.  
Sensor recording is executed at VR-716.  
Onscreen/Menu displayed at VR-716.  
Program Timer is in the Standby mode.  
[Sensor Recording: (5XX6)] is dis-  
played.  
[Onscreen/Menu Control: (5XX7)]  
is displayed.  
[Timer Mode Standby: (5XX8)] is  
displayed.  
[Video Playback in Progress:  
(5XX9)] is displayed.  
VR-716 is currently playing back recorded images  
files.  
Unable to gain access by entering  
the specified URL at the browser.  
Local address is being set.  
Disable the use of proxy servers in the “Internet  
Options” Menu of the Web browser.  
[Warning: Disable JavaScript in  
your web browser] is displayed.  
JavaScript is prohibited on the Web browser cur-  
rently used.  
Alter the security level in the “Internet Options”  
Menu of the Web browser.  
[Authorization Required] is dis-  
played.  
User Name and password verification during access  
to VR-716 failed.  
Access VR-716 again and enter the correct user  
name and password.  
User name and password are re-  
quested when [CONFIGURATION]  
and [TIMER RECORDING] are se-  
lected.  
The current access rights is of a different level.  
(Page 94)  
Login by entering a registered user name and  
password with a higher level of access rights.  
Password for Administrator rights  
forgotten and menu screen forWeb  
browser operation cannot be dis-  
played.  
Clients should manage important information such  
as passwords.  
Deactivation of password that involves security  
issue will be treated as repair.Please consult your  
nearest JVC dealer.  
[Timer Mode Standby cannot be  
activated] is displayed.  
There is no timer program in the Weekly Timer or  
Date Timer to be executed.  
Double-check settings of Weekly Timer and Date  
Timer.  
VR-716 is currently in the Normal  
Recording mode after the timer is  
released and operation via theWeb  
browser is not possible.  
[AFTER RELEASE] setting atVR-716 is set to “NOR-  
MAL REC”, hence recording starts in the Normal  
Recording mode when the timer is released.  
Recording cannot be stopped via the Web  
browser. Press the [STOP] at VR-716 to stop re-  
cording.  
Daily mode in the Weekly Timer  
cannot be selected.  
The starting day of the selected no. in the Weekly  
Timer is not set to [DAY].  
In the Program List forWeeklyTimer, click the [UP]  
button of the program for which the starting day is  
set as [DAY]. Set this to the Daily mode.  
New programs cannot be added to  
the Weekly Timer/Date Timer  
A maximum of 8 and 16 programs are allowed in  
the Weekly Timer and Date Timer respectively.  
To add new programs, do so using the [UP] and  
[DEL] buttons in the Program List.  
[***: (4xxx)] is displayed.  
[***: (xxxx)] is displayed.  
Processing of setting request from the Web browser  
failed.  
Select the menu item using the Menu button and  
resend request, or refresh the URL and perform  
operation via the Web browser again.  
[SYSTEM ERROR (E_xx): ***] is  
displayed.  
System error is detected at VR-716.  
Check the operational status at VR-716.  
Unable to view file list although the  
Browseable item in Share File  
Setup has been enabled.  
Configuration between VR-716 and the PC client’s  
network is incorrect.  
Set the IP address ofVR-716 and PC client to the  
same network domain as well as workgroup.  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Explanations (continued)  
Troubleshooting (continued)  
Troubleshooting on Use of Web Browsers (continued)  
Perform authentication for the PC if the following symptoms are observed.  
• [Browseable] has been enabled but files cannot be viewed at the Explorer.  
• When playback of event images is executed, the following message is displayed and playback fails.  
The specified file \\192.168.0.10\normal_h2\n1_030110_18023600.mpg (example) cannot be opened. User has no access  
rights to the shared folder, or connection to the folder is fully occupied and access is not possible.  
<Authentication Procedure>  
“START”  
Set Workgroup in network setting using  
the same name as on the PC.  
[Security]: [SHARE]  
[Security]: [USER]  
Authentication not required  
Register user at VR-716 using a  
different “User Name” as on the PC.  
(Access User registration)  
Register user at VR-716 using the same  
“User Name” as on the PC.  
(Access User registration)  
Register the user.  
Set the “Password”.  
Register the user.  
Set the “Password”.  
Reboot PC and “Login”.  
Reboot PC and “Login”.  
Authentication completed  
Start the Explorer on the PC, and open  
“My Network Places” z “Computers  
Near Me”  
Click the VR-716 icon.  
Input “User Name” and “Password”  
correctly.  
Authentication completed  
Upon authentication, access to and playing back recorded image files, or displaying recorded image files using the Explorer when  
[Browseable] is enabled are possible. Once authentication is completed, this will be valid until changes are made to the user name  
or authentication method.  
If access to image files still fails after performing the above procedure, turn off the power of the PC in use and restart the PC.  
Check the OS of the PC in use if the above error message continues to appear after authentication is performed. (Page 74)  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Messages  
Displayed Message  
Cause  
Action  
[VR-716 Player] is not installed in  
this PC or [VR-716 Player] is ac-  
tive and execution is not possible.  
Either the [VR-716 Player] application software is  
not installed or both the [VR-716 Player] and Simple  
Viewer are launched.  
If it is not installed, do so using the CD-ROM sup-  
plied. End [VR-716 Player] when both are  
launched.  
The specified file [****] cannot be  
opened.  
User has no access rights to the  
shared folder, or connection to the  
folder is fully occupied and access  
is not possible.  
The shared folder at VR-716 is currently accessed  
by other users (maximum 1 user) or authentication  
of the shared folder is not performed.  
Perform authentication.  
(Page 108 ‘Authentication Procedure’)  
Access to the folder by the access user is enabled  
if the folder remains inactive for 1 minute or more.  
Cannot read recorded image files.  
Check if the shared folder at VR-  
716 can be viewed.  
The image file is currently being played back at VR-  
716, or error in occurred in reading the recorded  
image file due to heavy network traffic.  
Check whether the shared folder can be viewed  
via the network after playback at VR-716 has  
stopped.Restart the Web browser if the folder can  
be viewed but connection cannot be established.  
• File format not supported. File  
cannot be opened.  
ActiveX internal error has occurred.  
Restart the Viewer window.  
• Error occurred.  
• Playback is not possible due to  
insufficient memory.  
• Exception handling occurred.  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Explanations (continued)  
Web Browser Glossary  
The network name for which the network-connected PC belongs to.  
Domain name  
Host Name  
Name of PC (or VR-716) on the network.  
The name of the PC connected to the network is managed by a database called DNS (Domain  
Name System). DNS links the IP address assigned to each PC with the domain names, and  
enables a user to specify a PC to access.  
An identification number assigned to each PC connected to the network. This is used for com-  
munication between network devices.  
IP Address  
There are 2 types of IP address, namely Global IP Address and Local IP Address (Private IP  
Address).  
Global IP Address  
Local IP Address  
IP Address  
: Just as separate IP addresses are required on a network, this is also  
required for all PCs that are connected to the Internet throughout the  
world. Such an IP address is known as the Global IP Address and is  
usually assigned by the Internet service provider.  
: Separate IP addresses can be used freely within networks that are not  
connected to the Internet (eg.within a family or company).This is known  
as the Local IP Address.  
Host Name  
Domain Name  
192.168.0.10  
vr716  
jvc-victor.co.jp  
.
Convert  
IP addresses assigned by the PC is converted by the DNS  
server into host names and domain names.  
This is a method that automatically assigns IP addresses on the network.  
The DHCP server will automatically assign an IP address to a PC when it is connected to the  
network.  
DHCP  
(Dynamic Host Control Protocol)  
A mechanism that manages a network by segmenting it into multiple virtual networks (subnets).  
Subnet mask is a 32-bit value that is used to define how many bits to be used within the IP  
address for identifying the subnet.  
Subnet mask  
A network that is built within a comparatively confined area such as within a building, company  
or office.  
LAN  
(Local Area Network)  
Hardware and software that are used mutually for the translation of different protocols during  
communication of a PC with one that does not belong to the same network. In Windows, setting  
of a default gateway is required when setting the IP address.  
Default Gateway  
A set of rules used for communication of PCs or devices via the network.  
Protocol  
TCP/IP  
Abbreviation for Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol.This is 1 of the protocols used  
by the network.  
Refers to the commencement of use upon connection of a PC terminal to an online database or  
server.  
Login  
A small-scale network that connects PCs on a peer level (1-to-1).  
Peer-to-Peer  
Workgroup  
A group that is set up among a small number of PCs in a work unit to ease reference of data on  
other PCs. It will be difficult to manage if there are a few hundred Windows-based PCs that are  
sharing the same network. In this case, management by setting up workgroups will be neces-  
sary.  
A service that displays PCs within a workgroup or domain, or the list of resources.  
Browsing Function  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording Mechanism  
Normal Recording  
Beginning of hard  
disk  
End of  
hard disk  
Event5  
Event1  
Record  
Event2  
Record  
Event4  
Event3  
Record  
Record  
Record  
Recording is executed from the start till the end of the hard disk  
during normal recording.  
A recording operation from the time it starts till it ends is re-  
ferred to as an “Event”.  
Recording will stop when it reaches the end of the hard disk,  
and further recording will not be possible.  
When playback of events is executed as in the above diagram,  
the playback (audio and video) image will freeze for an instant  
at the boundaries of events.  
Notes  
• When the remaining hard disk space reaches below 1%, signals will be  
sent out form the [SERIES REC OUT] terminal on the rear panel.  
(Page 61)  
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
CAUTION  
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK  
DO NOT OPEN  
AVIS:RISQUE DE CHOC  
ELECTRIQ  
1
4/ 16  
5
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11 13 15 RST COM  
IN  
IN  
EXT REC  
CLK SER  
WAR RST REC  
OUT OUT OUT  
10 12 14 16 OUT  
ALARM  
9
12  
13 16  
EE OUT  
COM  
[SERIES REC OUT]  
Terminal  
Set the menu during output of signals from the [SERIES REC OUT]  
terminal as follows.  
OPERATION/EXT REC  
[ OPERATION ]  
1.RECOVERY REC  
2.REPEAT REC  
PRIOR STATE  
OFF  
3.LANGUAGE SELECTION  
4.WATER MARK  
5.OPERATION LOCK  
[EXT REC]  
1.EXT REC MODE  
2.SERIES REC  
ENGLISH  
OFF  
ALL  
OFF  
ON  
• Once a recording operation is stopped, it may take a few seconds be-  
fore it can be started again.  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Explanations (continued)  
Recording Mechanism (continued)  
Repeat Record  
When recording reaches the end of the hard disk and there is no space left for recording, it returns to the start of the hard disk to  
overwrite old data. Such an operation is known as Repeat Record. Set this in the “REPEAT REC” item of the “OPERATION/EXT  
REC” Menu. Refer to ‘Changing Menu Settings’ on page 22.  
When “ALARM LOCK” is selected  
Executes repeat recording in the normal recording area (free  
space) excluding alarm recording data.  
Beginning of  
Hard Disk  
OPERATION/EXT REC  
[ OPERATION ]  
1.RECOVERY REC  
2.REPEAT REC  
3.LANGUAGE SELECTION  
4.WATER MARK  
5.OPERATION LOCK  
[EXT REC]  
1.EXT REC MODE  
2.SERIES REC  
End of Hard  
Disk  
PRIOR STATE  
ALARM LOCK  
ENGLISH  
OFF  
Event3  
Record  
Event1  
Record  
Event2  
Record  
Alarm1  
Alarm2  
ALL  
OFF  
OFF  
Alarm Record  
Alarm Record  
Stops when there are too many alarm records and no space is  
left for the normal recording area.  
Beginning of  
Hard Disk  
End of Hard  
Disk  
Alarm3  
Record  
Alarm1  
Alarm4  
Record  
Alarm5  
Record  
Alarm6  
Record  
Alarm2  
Record  
Record  
Recording Stops  
[SERIES REC OUT]  
When “ALARM STOP” is selected  
When executing repeat recording without alarm recording.  
Beginning of  
Hard Disk  
End of Hard  
Disk  
OPERATION/EXT REC  
[ OPERATION ]  
1.RECOVERY REC  
2.REPEAT REC  
3.LANGUAGE SELECTION  
4.WATER MARK  
5.OPERATION LOCK  
[EXT REC]  
1.EXT REC MODE  
2.SERIES REC  
PRIOR STATE  
ALARM STOP  
ENGLISH  
OFF  
Event3  
Record  
Event1  
Record  
Event2  
Record  
Event4  
Record  
Event5  
Record  
Event6  
Record  
ALL  
OFF  
OFF  
Repeat recording cannot be executed when there is 1 or more  
alarm record.  
Beginning of  
Hard Disk  
End of Hard  
Disk  
Event3  
Record  
Alarm1  
Event1  
Record  
Event2  
Record  
Event4  
Record  
Event5  
Record  
Record  
Recording Stops  
[SERIES REC OUT]  
Execute repeat recording regardless of alarm recording/normal  
recording area. Recording continues endlessly until [STOP] is  
pressed.  
When “ALLis selected  
OPERATION/EXT REC  
[ OPERATION ]  
1.RECOVERY REC  
2.REPEAT REC  
PRIOR STATE  
ALL  
End of Hard  
3.LANGUAGE SELECTION  
4.WATER MARK  
5.OPERATION LOCK  
[EXT REC]  
ENGLISH  
OFF  
Beginning of  
Hard Disk  
Disk  
ALL  
1.EXT REC MODE  
2.SERIES REC  
OFF  
OFF  
Event3  
Record  
Event1  
Record  
Event2  
Record  
Event4  
Record  
Alarm1  
Record  
Alarm2  
Record  
Caution  
• The illustrations above on recording models are merely image diagrams  
and is different from the actual method of recording.  
• Repeat Record overwrites from the oldest event. Data that has been  
overwritten will be totally deleted.  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Presensor Recording  
Presensor Recording is a feature that works hand-in-hand with Sensor Recording that starts recording automatically by tracing  
back to the time prior to the input of alarm signals. Set this in the “PRESENSOR REC” and “PRESENSOR REC DURATION” items  
of the “ALARM/SENSOR MODE” Menu. Refer to ‘Changing Menu Settings’ on page 22.  
<Example>  
Perform a 30-second presensor recording  
when in the Sensor Recording mode.  
Sensor recording in  
standby mode  
(stop mode)  
Alarm  
ALARM/SENSOR MODE  
1.BLOCK  
2.REC MODE  
3.FRAME RATE  
4.QUALITY  
1
ALARM  
25 IPS  
H
Event (Sensor)  
Presensor  
5.DURATION  
180SEC  
OFF  
6.AUDIO REC  
7.PRESENSOR REC  
8.PRESENSOR REC DURATION  
9.EXT INPUT OPERATING MODE  
10.MOTION DETECT  
11.MOTION DETECT SETTING  
ON  
Sensor recording  
30SEC  
OFF  
OFF  
Presensor recording  
30 seconds  
Sensor recording starts at the same time when alarm signals  
are received. Upon the start of sensor recording, presensor re-  
cording will also start recording automatically for a 30-second  
interval.  
<Presensor Recording Preset Values  
and Actual Recording Duration>  
Settings  
Actual Recording Duration  
10 ~ 20 seconds  
10 seconds  
20 seconds  
30 seconds  
20 ~ 30 seconds  
30 ~ 60 seconds  
• A few frames will be left out between  
presensor and sensor recording.  
• The portion recorded by presensor record-  
ing cannot be retrieved by alarm/sensor  
search.  
• Presensor recording may be split up into 2  
segments, depending on the input timing of  
the alarm signals. In this case, 2 presensor  
recording data will exist with respect to 1  
sensor recording when search is performed  
on the Web. In addition, image may freeze  
for an instant at the interface of the 2  
presensor records.  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Explanations (continued)  
Skip Jump  
There are 3 types of Skip Jump, namely “TIME”, “ALARM” and “EVENT”, which can be specified in the search menu. Set this in the  
“SKIP MODE” item of the “SEARCH MENU”. Refer to ‘View Recorded Images in the Skip Mode’ on page 43.  
When “TIME” is selected  
Selecting “1HOUR” for Time Jump Setting enables jumps in 1  
hour intervals every time the [SKIP] button is pressed. Jumps to  
the closest position from the specified time onwards if the time  
to jump to is not found.  
SEARCH MENU  
1.SEARCH SETTING  
2.DATE/TIME SEARCH  
3.ALARM/SENSOR SEARCH  
4.SKIP MODE  
PREVIOUS  
TIME  
1HOUR  
5.TIME JUMP SETTING  
10:30  
Record  
13:00 15:00  
Stop Record  
12:00 12:15  
Stop Record  
Event1  
Event2  
Event3  
1 HOUR  
1 HOUR  
11:30  
10:30  
12:30  
15:00  
When “ALARM” is selected  
Pressing [SKIP] each time enables a jump to the start position  
of alarm or sensor recording.  
SEARCH MENU  
1.SEARCH SETTING  
2.DATE/TIME SEARCH  
3.ALARM/SENSOR SEARCH  
4.SKIP MODE  
PREVIOUS  
ALARM  
1HOUR  
Event5  
Event2  
Event4  
Presensor  
recording  
5.TIME JUMP SETTING  
Event1  
Event3  
(Sensor1)  
(Alarm2)  
(Alarm1)  
When “EVENT” is selected  
Pressing [SKIP] each time enables a jump to the start position  
of recording (start of an event).  
SEARCH MENU  
1.SEARCH SETTING  
2.DATE/TIME SEARCH  
3.ALARM/SENSOR SEARCH  
4.SKIP MODE  
PREVIOUS  
Event2  
Event4  
Event5  
Presensor  
Event1  
Event3  
(Sensor1)  
(Alarm2)  
(Alarm1)  
EVENT  
1HOUR  
5.TIME JUMP SETTING  
Note  
• When there are too many events, it may take a while before Jump can  
be executed.  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording Duration  
Actual recording duration varies according to the input image as well as hard disk conditions. The table below is an example of  
detailed images (eg. in a casino) that illustrates the recording duration based on different modes of recording quality. Refer to the  
following table when recording detailed images.  
Requirements: Upon setup of standard HDD (160 GB), 4 inputs per block  
Recording duration for Each Setting (Unit: Hour)  
Recording Quality  
Audio  
25 IPS  
12.5 IPS 8.3 IPS  
4.2 IPS 2.5 IPS 1.7 IPS  
1 IPS  
1/2 IPS 1/6 IPS 1/12IPS  
9
16  
16  
21  
21  
29  
30  
37  
40  
20  
21  
27  
28  
37  
39  
46  
50  
32  
34  
38  
40  
47  
51  
62  
69  
40  
43  
49  
53  
59  
65  
76  
87  
47  
51  
58  
64  
70  
80  
99  
118  
50  
95  
HIGH  
YES  
NO  
9
55  
112  
180  
255  
210  
321  
233  
377  
333  
776  
674  
1493  
1888  
2177  
12  
13  
19  
19  
24  
25  
108  
131  
129  
163  
148  
195  
NORMAL  
BASIC  
YES  
NO  
YES  
NO  
976  
LONG  
YES  
NO  
1148  
Requirements: Upon setup of standard HDD (160 GB), 1 input per block  
Recording duration for Each Setting (Unit: Hour)  
Recording Quality  
Audio  
25 IPS  
9
12.5 IPS 8.3 IPS  
4.2 IPS 2.5 IPS 1.7 IPS  
1 IPS  
1/2IPS  
1/6 IPS 1/12 IPS  
HIGH  
YES  
NO  
17  
17  
21  
22  
30  
32  
47  
51  
23  
24  
29  
30  
41  
44  
68  
77  
33  
35  
46  
50  
66  
74  
99  
118  
41  
44  
48  
52  
51  
95  
9
55  
113  
269  
482  
304  
603  
334  
737  
336  
685  
2817  
3510  
4283  
NORMAL  
BASIC  
YES  
NO  
12  
13  
17  
17  
25  
26  
55  
68  
176  
248  
207  
312  
237  
386  
61  
76  
1463  
1841  
2262  
YES  
NO  
83  
102  
122  
137  
177  
96  
LONG  
YES  
NO  
116  
144  
* Recording duration may shorten by about 10% depending on the hard disk condition as well as type of image.  
* When in the Repeat Record mode, recording will be deleted from the oldest data to create recording space when it is running out  
on the hard disk.  
As such, recording duration may shorten by 10% as compared to the case when Repeat Record is set to “OFF”.  
* Recording duration may shorten due to wear and tear of the hard disk over time.  
* When new hard disks are added, recording duration may slow down proportionately with the capacity of the new disk.  
* Recording duration will reduce by half when the mirroring settings are activated. (Upon setup of a standard HDD)  
RS-232C Connection  
Control of VR-716 via external devices is possible by connecting VR-716 to the device via the [RS-232C] remote terminal on the  
rear panel.  
For more details, refer to the [RS232CMANUAL.PDF] file located inside the [RS232CMANUAL] of the CD-ROM (VR-716 Player)  
that is supplied with VR-716.  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Explanations (continued)  
Notes related to Summer Time  
VR-716 makes use of Time Zone to perform automatic switch-  
ing for Summer Time and Winter Time.  
4. Playback  
1) Playback using the main unit  
When playing back the recording crossing the Summer and  
Winter Time, the playback time (date/time displayed on the  
OSD) of this portion may differ from the actual time.  
* The starting/ending time of Summer Time may differ from  
the actual time in your local area.  
1. Changing the Time Zone  
2) Playback using the web browser or 716 player  
When playing back the recording crossing the Summer and  
WinterTime, the ending time and the clock counter displayed  
may differ from the actual time.  
After changing the Time Zone during operation, make sure to  
format all the hard disks. If the hard disk is not formatted after  
changing the Time Zone, the following problems will arise.  
• During playback on main unit, web browser or 716 player,  
the time display will be different from the actual recorded time.  
• When performing file backup using 716 player, proper backup  
cannot be performed because the actual recorded time data  
is different from the time data specified by the player.  
• The Alarm List will be different from the actual recorded time.  
• The list for DVD-RAM copy will be different from the actual  
recorded time.  
5. Timer Programming  
When the time changes from Summer to Winter or vice versa  
during TIMER REC, the recording will be divided and recorded  
as a different event at the changing point. In addition, a few sec-  
onds will not be recorded at the changing point.  
On the day when switching from Summer time to Winter time,  
there is a duplicated period where the same time will be reached  
twice.  
2. Changing the time  
Do not set the starting/ending time within the duplicated period  
on the day when switching from summer time to winter time.  
The time change by Summer Time will be performed automati-  
cally according to the setting value of the selected area in “TIME  
ZONE” setting. On the day when switching from Summer time  
to Winter time, there is a duplicated period where the same time  
will be reached twice. During this period, do not perform date/  
time setting (Menu/RS-232C/Front Display) and clock reset (Har-  
monica terminal/Front Panel).  
6. DVD-RAM COPY  
1) Selecting the data list of the DVD-RAM  
• The specified starting time search of the Summer/Winter  
duplicated period will be searched as Winter Time.  
• For the data list of the DVD-RAM of Summer/Winter dupli-  
cated period, the data will be displayed in the order of the  
actual recording start time.  
• On the day when switching fromWinterTime to SummerTime,  
there are certain times that do not exist.Do not perform speci-  
fied starting time search for these times.  
3. Searching  
For the Alarm List of the duplicated period of Summer/ Winter  
Time, the data will be displayed in the order of the actual record-  
ing time starts.  
On the day when switching from Winter time to Summer time,  
there are certain times that do not exist. Do not perform “DATE/  
TIME SEARCH” for these times.  
2) Cutting of the DVD-RAM record  
• The starting/ending time of the data crossing the Summer  
and Winter cannot be changed. When copying, the original  
starting/ending time will be copied.  
When searching the image recorded during the duplicated pe-  
riod on the day when switching from Summer time to Winter  
time, two images with the same time will exist.The operation of  
the various searches is shown below.  
7. PC environment settings  
When searching or playing back from the web browser, set the  
PCTIME ZONE setting to the same as theVR-716 “TIME ZONE”  
setting.  
1) “DATE/TIME SEARCH” in the “SEARCH MENU” on the main unit  
It will search for Winter Time. When searching for the “Sum-  
mer Time” of the duplicated period, search using the jog/  
shuttle dial or [SKIP] buttons after performing “DATE/TIME  
8. The alarm list for mail notification  
• For the message content of the mail notification, the local  
time will be recorded.  
• When duplicated times are recorded due to Summer Time,  
to differentiate the message recorded in Summer Time or  
Winter Time, check the time sent stated on the mail header.  
SEARCH”  
.
2) “ALARM SEARCH” in the “SEARCH MENU” on the main unit  
It will search for Winter Time. When searching for the “Sum-  
mer Time” of the duplicated period, search using the jog dial  
or [SKIP] buttons.  
3) Search using the web browser or 716 player  
It will search for Winter Time. When searching for the “Sum-  
mer Time” of the duplicated period, specify the starting time  
at an earlier period before the duplicated period to search.  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Others  
Specifications  
<Audio signal>  
Audio input  
<General>  
: 1 line  
Video compression  
Capacity  
: MPEG-2 (Conformity)  
: 80 GB x 2  
Audio output  
: 3 lines (Front x 1, rear x 2)  
:-8 dBs, 50 k¸ (Unbalanced)  
:-8 dBs, 1 k¸ (Unbalanced)  
: 100 Hz ~ 10 kHz  
Line input level  
Line output level  
Frequency  
Interface  
: Ultra Wide SCSI, RS-232C  
UPS, LAN  
Power supply  
: 220 V - 240 V  
: 0.5 A  
50 Hz/60 Hz  
Audio compression  
: 48 kHz sampling,  
Power consumption  
MPEG 1 layer 2 conformity  
Allowable operating temperature : 5˚C ~ 40˚C  
Allowable storage temperature : -20˚C ~ 60˚C  
Allowable operating humidity : 30 % ~ 80 %  
<Accessories>  
Instructions  
x 1  
x 1  
x 2  
x 2  
x 4  
x 4  
x 1  
Mass  
: Approx, 7.0 kg  
Install manual  
Power cord  
<Video signal>  
Video input  
Bracket (Rack Mount)  
Screws (M4)  
Screws (M5)  
CD-ROM  
: 16 lines  
(supports asynchronous input)  
: 16 lines (Through)  
Video output x 3 lines  
(Front x 1, rear x 2)  
Split EE output 4 lines  
: 1.0 V (p-p), 75 ¸  
Video output  
Line input  
(BNC unbalanced)  
Line output  
: 1.0 V (p-p), 75 ¸  
(BNC unbalanced)  
Number of effective pixels : 720 x 576  
(Maximum number when in full  
screen recording)  
: 360 x 288  
(When recording in QUAD  
mode)  
<Appearance>  
HDD  
FWD  
OPERATE  
CANCEL  
SEARCH  
MENU  
1
3
2
4
ALARM  
5
7
6
REV  
SENSOR  
ALARM  
8
TIMER  
LOCK  
OUT  
SENSOR  
9
10  
1
ALARM  
13  
15  
14  
16  
SENSOR  
DISPLAY  
EXECUTE  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
SEQUENCE  
MULTI  
REC  
STOP  
PLAY  
STILL  
11  
ALARM  
SKIP  
SENSOR  
420  
unit: mm  
Specifications and appearance of this unit are subject to change for improvement without prior notice.  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
®
VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED  
® is a registered trademark owned by VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LTD.  
® is a registered trademark in Japan, the U.S.A., the U.K. and many other countries.  
© 2003 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED  
LST0151-001A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Indesit Washer IWE 7125 User Manual
Ingersoll Rand Heat Pump 637012 X User Manual
Jonsered Brush Cutter GC2236 User Manual
JVC Camcorder GR AX510 User Manual
JVC Car Stereo System FX240 User Manual
JVC Car Stereo System GET0735 001A User Manual
JVC DVD Recorder VR N100U User Manual
JVC Flat Panel Television LV42740 001A User Manual
Kenmore Range 7909662 User Manual
Konica Minolta Digital Camera TC X User Manual